Home

HP 4395A Service

Contents

1. A50 2 001 5 A8 I i T I A40 L 51 A7 506016 Figure A 10 Top View Major Assemblies Manual Changes 13 Table A 13 View Major Assemblies Ref Agilent Part C Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number A2 E4970 66502 9 1 DC BIAS Opt 001 28480 4970 66502 A3 E4970 66503 0 1 TRACKING SOURCE 28480 E4970 66503 E4970 69503 1 TRACKING SOURCE 28480 4970 69503 rebuilt exchange A5 E4970 66505 2 1 LOCAL SYNTHESIZER 28480 E4970 66505 E4970 69505 LOCAL SYNTHESIZER 28480 E4970 69505 rebuilt exchange AT E4970 66507 4 1 FREQ CONVERTER 28480 4970 66507 E4970 69507 FREQ CONVERTER 28480 4970 69507 rebuilt exchange 8 4970 66508 5 1 DIGITAL IF 28480 E4970 66508 E4970 69508 DIGITAL IF 28480 E4970 69508 rebuilt exchange A40 0950 3246 7 1 PRE REGULATOR 28480 0950 3246 50 4970 66550 1 DC DC CONVERTER 28480 4970 66550 51 E4970 66551 8 1 GSP 28480 E4970 66551
2. N m N m Adapter Power Sensor N m N m Cable Power Splitter Direct Connection No Cable CCS05008 Figure 5 16 Receiver Flatness Adjustment Setup gt 1 MHz 5 28 Adjustments 13 Receiver Attenuator Adjustment The purpose of this procedure is to obtain the correction constants to correct the receiver Required Equipment Type N Cable 61 cm 11500B or part of 11851B Procedure 1 Run the Adjustment Program 2 Select the RCVR ATT and press GK in the list box 3 Following the Adjustment Program instructions complete this procedure 00000000 N m N m Cable CCS05009 Figure 5 17 Receiver Attenuator Adjustment Setup Adjustments 5 29 14 IF BPF Flatness Adjustment The purpose of this procedure is to adjust the IF Band Pass Filter Required Equipment Power Meter 436A Opt 022 437B or 438A Power Sensor rr 8482A Signal Generator 8642B 8644B 8663A Multimeter 3458A Two Way Power Splitter 11667A Type N Cable 61 cm
3. Adapter Power Sensor Cable Power Splitter CCS05006 Figure 5 12 Receiver Gain Adjustment Setup 8 Initialize the signal generator Then set the control as follows Controls Settings Frequency 16 MHz Amplitude 6 dBm 9 On the signal generator adjust the amplitude until the power meter reads 0 0 05 dBm 10 Adjust GAIN ADJ until pass is displayed on the screen Adjustments 5 23 A7 GAIN ADJ CCS05015 5 24 Adjustments Figure 5 13 Receiver Gain Adjustment Location 10 IF 8 dB 16 dB Gain Adjustment The purpose of this procedure is to generate the correction constants for the 8 dB 16 dB amplifier on the A D converter assy Required Equipment Power Meter 436A Opt 022 437B or 438A Power Sensor 8482A Signal Generator 8642B 8644B 8663A Multimeter eh ah i i A 3458A Two Way Power Splitter 11667A Type N Cable 61 cm 11500B or part of 11851B N m N m adapter
4. N m N m Adapter Power Sensor N m N m Cable Power Splitter Direct Connection No Cable 502010 Figure 2 13 Absolute Amplitude Accuracy Test Setup 2 c Press Meas ANALYZER TYPE NETWORK ANALYZER to initialize the 4395 Then set the controls as follows Control Settings Key Strokes Source Power 4 dBm Source POWER C 4 IF BW 100 Hz Bw Ave IF BW 1 o o Input Attenuator R 10dB Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN R 1 9 Input Attenuator 104 B Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN 1 0 Input Attenuator B 10dB Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN B 1 Number of Points 11 Sweep NUMBER of POINTS 1 i Frequency Span 0 Hz Span ZERO SPAN Statistics ON Utility STATISTICS on OFF Then the softkey label changes to STATISTICS ON off d Press Meas R to set the 4395A to the R input e Perform the following steps to test the absolute amplitude accuracy at the R input 2 34 Performance Tests gt gs i Press Center 1 to set the 4395A center frequency to the first test frequency 1 MHz listed in Table 2 13 Table 2 13 lists test frequencies Table 2 13 Absolute Amplitude Accuracy Test Settings 2 4395A Center Frequency 1 MHz 2 MHz 5 MHz 8 MHz 10 MHz 20 MHz 50 MHz 100 MHz 125 MHz 1 5
5. Fan Power Cable Depend on the fan speed Disassembled Rear Panel CBSO5009 Figure 7 8 Fan Troubleshooting Setup e Turn the DC power supply on Adjust the output voltage to 24 f Check the fan is rotating Check the FAN LOCK signal is as shown in Figure 7 8 m If che fan is not rotating or the FAN LOCK signal is unexpected replace the fan m If these are good the fan is verified m Reconnect the fan power cable to the Motherboard A20J18 7 12 Power Supply Troubleshooting 2 Troubleshoot the A50 DC DC Converter 4395A Top View R Pulse Generator Frequency 30Hz Rear Panel A50J2 Pin10 GND A50J2 Pin9 FANLOCK A50 DC DC Converter To A50J2 Pin5 Resisto
6. e a m e e e 8482A Multimeter e m m e m e ha rn 3458A Two Way Power Splitter 11667A Type N Cable 61 em 11500B or part of 11851B N m N m adapter mene PN 1250 1475 N m BNC f adapter PN 1250 0780 BNC cable 61 em hn PN 8120 1339 500 Feedthrough HII PN 04192 61002 BNC f Dual Banana Plug Adapter PN 1251 2277 Procedure 1 Run the Adjustment Program 2 Select the RCVR FLAT and press OK in the list box 3 Following the Adjustment Program instructions complete this procedure Multimeter Banana PI 00000000 N m N m Adapter N m BNC f Adapter H gp N m N m Cable U BNC m BNC m Cable 61 Power Splitter Direct Connection No Cable CCS05007 Figure 5 15 Receiver Flatness Adjustment Setup 1 MHz Adjustments 5 27 Power Meter 00000000
7. Power Splitter oH 6dB Fixed Attenuation Cable 6dB Fixed Attenuation m Step Attenuator VSWR lt 1 02 CCS 02013 Figure 2 15 A R Magnitude Ratio Phase Dynamic Accuracy Test Setup 2 i On the 4395A set the controls as follows Control Settings Key Strokes Source Power 8 dBm Source POWER 8 1 Active Channel CH 1 1 Averaging Factor 4 Bw Avg AVERAGING FACTOR 4 x1 Active Channel CH 2 ch 2 Averaging Factor 4 Bw Avg AVERAGING FACTOR 4 a Input Attenuator R 10dB Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN R 1 0 Input Attenuator 04 Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN A 1 j Set the step attenuator to 10 dB Press cal CALIBRATE MENU RESPONSE THRU to perform the response THRU calibration Wait for the completion of the sweep Then press DONE RESPONSE Performance Tests 2 39 I Set the step attenuator to the first setting 20dB in the second colum of Table 2 15 Table 2 15 A R Dynamic Accuracy Test Settings 2 4395A Step Attenuator Input Level 20 dB 20 dB 30 dB 30 dB 40 dB 40 dB 50 dB 50 dB 60 dB 60 dB 70 dB TU dB 80 dB 80 dB 90 dB 90 dB 100 dB 100 dB m Perform the following steps to measure the dynamic accuracy 1 ii ii iv Record the channel 2 marker re
8. 5 5 ppm Precision frequency reference accuracy option 1D5 00 C to 55 C referenced to 23 t0 13 ppm Test Equipment For testing a standard 4395A not equipped without Opt 1D5 Frequency Counter hme ash 5334B BNC cable 61 cm mr PN 8120 1339 N m BNC f adapter PN 1250 0780 For testing an 4395A equipped with Opt 1D5 Frequency Counter ca 5334B Frequency Standard 5061B BNC cable 61 cm mr PN 8120 1839 BNC cable 122 n PN 8120 1840 N m BNC f adapter PN 1250 0780 1 The 5061B can be replaced with any 10 MHz frequency standard with time base error of lt 1x 10 10 Procedure 1 Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2 1 For testing a standard 4395A not equipped with Option 1D5 do not connect any cable to the EXT REF Input connector in the 4395A rear panel For testing an 4395A equipped with Option 105 connect a BNC m BNC m cable between the EXT REF Input connector and the REF OVEN connector on the 4395A rear panel 2 2 Performance Tests Frequency Standard Frequency Standard is required when the test is performed using a standard f
9. 0 5 dB Test Equipment Power Meter 436A Opt 022 437B or 438A Power Sensor oo ccc e a 8481D Step Attenuator 10 dB Step VSWR lt 1 02 8496G Opt 001 and H60 Attenuator driver re 11713A Type N Cable 61 cm 11500B or part of 11851B Procedure 1 Connect the power sensor to the power meter Then calibrate the power meter for the power sensor 2 Set the step attenuator to 30 dB before connecting the test equipment This protects the power sensor from excess input 3 Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2 5 Performance Tests 2 11 Power Meter 00000000 00 0000 N m N m Cable Power Sensor D Step Attenuator VSWR lt 1 02 502027 Figure 2 5 Power Sweep Linearity Test Setup 4 Press Meas ANALYZER TYPE NETWORK ANALYZER to initialize the 4395A Then set the controls as follows Control Settings Key Strokes Power Sweep Sweep SWEEP TYPE MENU POWER SWEEP CW Frequency 50 MHz Source CW FREQ 5 0 Start Power 50 dBm start C 6 9 x1 Stop Power 30 dBm stop C 3 6 1 Number of Points 5 Sweep NUMBER of POINTS 5
10. N m N m Cable 502034 Figure 2 23 Noise Sidebands Test Setup 3 Press Meas ANALYZER TYPE SPECTRUM ANALYZER Preset to initialize the 4395A Then set the controls as follows Control Settings Key Strokes Input Port R R Reference Level 0 dBm Scale Ref REFERENCE VALUE 0 Noise Form ON Utliy NOISE FORM on OFF Then the softkey label changes to NOISE FORM off Input Attenuator Auto Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN auto MAN Then the softkey label changes to ATTEN AUTO man 4 On the signal generator set the frequency to the first carrier frequency 10 MHz in Table 2 21 2 62 Performance Tests Table 2 21 Noise Sideband Test Settings Signal Generator 4395A Offset Carrier Frequency Center RBW VBW Frequency Span from Carrier Frequency 10 MHz 10 MHz 100 Hz 1 Hz 2 5 kHz 1 kHz 1 kHz 3 Hz 25 kHz 10 kHz 1kHz 10 Hz 250 kHz 100 kHz 10 kHz 100 Hz 2 5 MHz 1 MHz 100 MHz 100 MHz 100 Hz 1 Hz 2 5 kHz 1 kHz 1 kHz 3 Hz 25 kHz 10 kHz 1kHz 10 Hz 250 kHz 100 kHz 10 kHz 100 Hz 2 5 MHz 1 MHz 500 MHz 500 MHz 100 Hz 1 Hz 2 5 kHz 1 kHz 1 kHz 3 Hz 25 kHz 10 kHz 1kHz 10 Hz 250 kHz 100 kHz 10 kHz 100 Hz 2 5 MHz 1 MHz 5 On the 4395A press Center 1 0 to set the center frequency to 10 MHz 6 Perform the following steps to measure the noise sideband level at each offset va
11. A 14 Manual Changes CCS06055 Figure A 11 Main Frame Assembly Parts A5 and A7 Assemblies 18 23 Table A 14 Main Frame Assembly Parts A5 and A7 Assemblies 18 23 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 4970 66503 0 1 TRACKING SOURCE 28480 E4970 66503 2 E4970 66505 2 1 A5 LOCAL SYNTHESIZER 28480 E4970 66515 E4970 69515 A5 LOCAL SYNTHESIZER 28480 E4970 69515 rebuilt exchange 3 E4970 61615 5 1 CBL ASSY 28480 E4970 61615 4 E4970 66507 4 1 FREQ CONVERTER 28480 E4970 66507 E4970 69507 FREQ CONVERTER 28480 E4970 69507 rebuilt exchange 5 E4970 66508 5 1 DIGITAL IF 28480 E4970 66508 Manual Changes A 15 506057 Figure A 12 Main Frame Assembly Parts YTO Assembly 20 23 Table A 15 Main Frame Assembly Parts YTO Assembly 20 23 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 0955 0777 3 1 3 6GHZ 28480 0955 0777 2 4970 61613 3 1 IRF CBL ASSY 28480 E4970 61613 3 08590 60035 2 1 CABLE ASSY 28480 08590 60035 4 E4970 00626 0 1 CASE SHIELD 28480 E4970 00626 5 2200 0101 0 2 SCR MACH 4 40 28480 2200 0101 Note When the old assembly 0955 0777 is faulty replace both the YTO the 5 board and the cable assembly with new ones A 16 Manual Changes Serial Number Agi
12. heh 11667A Type N Cable 61 cm 11500B or part of 11851B BNC cable 61 em hn PN 8120 1839 BNC cable 122 em memet PN 8120 1840 N m N m adapter PN 1250 1475 N m BNC f adapter PN 1250 0780 Procedure 1 For testing high frequencies a Connect the power sensor to the power meter Calibrate the power meter for the power sensor b Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2 24 Performance Tests 2 65 Connect the signal generator s 10 MHz frequency reference output to the 4395A EXT REF Input on the rear panel as shown in Figure 2 24 With this 3 configuration both the signal generator and the 4395A are phase locked to the same reference frequency to obtain a stable measurement Signal Generator TO FREQ REF OUTPUT BNC m BNC m Cable 122 cm Power Meter 00000000 N m N m Adapter Power Sensor N m N m Cable Power Splitter 502022 Figure 2 24 Frequency Response Test Setup 1 c Initialize the signal generator
13. PN 1250 1475 BNC cable 122 em memet PN 8120 1840 Procedure 1 Run the Adjustment Program 2 Select the IFgain 8 16 and press in the list box 3 Following the Adjustment Program instructions complete this procedure Signal Generator TO ooo 22 FREQ REF CJ 000 O zia e DQUTPUT C ooong00on0 BNC m BNC m Cable 122 cm Power Meter 00000000 N m N m Adapter Power Sensor N m N m Cable Power Splitter CCS05006 Figure 5 14 IF 8 dB 16 dB Gain Adjustment Setup Adjustments 5 25 11 Temperature Adjustment The purpose of this procedure is to record the temperature during adjustments Required Equipment None Procedure 1 Run the Adjustment Program 2 Select the and press OK in the list box 3 Following the Adjustment Program instructions complete this procedure 5 26 Adjustments 12 Receiver Flatness Adjustment The purpose of this procedure is to obtain the correction constants that correct the receiver flatness Required Equipment Power Meter 436A Opt 022 437B or 438A Power Sensor
14. 20000000 BNC m BNC m Cable 61 CCS05011 Figure 5 19 Bias Adjustment Setup 1 Adjustments 5 31 20000000 BNC m BNC m Cable 61 CCS05012 Figure 5 20 DC Bias Adjustment Setup 2 5 32 Adjustments Troubleshooting INTRODUCTION This chapter describes troubleshooting flow and provides the procedure to determine which group or an assembly is faulty and should be checked TROUBLESHOOTING SUMMARY The troubleshooting strategy of this manual is based on a verification rather than symptomatic approach This chapter describes typical troubleshooting procedure step by step and you can identify a faulty assembly or a faulty group by following the trobleshooting steps sequentially And if you could identify only the faulty group refer to the appropriate chapter following this chapter Each of following three chapters verifies one at a time the assemblies within a group until the faulty assembly is identified These chapters employ more lengthy complicated procedures The three functional groups are power supply digital control and accessories Figure 6 1 diagrams the troub
15. b dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB Calculation Sheet 3 9 Input B Frequency 100 Hz 200 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 2 kHz 5 kHz 10 kHz 20 kHz 50 kHz 100 kHz 200 kHz 500 kHz 1 MHz 2 MHz 5 MHz 8 MHz 10 MHz 20 50 100 MHz 125 MHz 175 MHz 200 MHz 225 MHz 275 MHz 300 MHz 325 MHz 375 MHz 400 MHz 425 MHz 415 MHz 500 MHz 3 10 Calculation Sheet 4395A Reading a dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm Meter Reading b dBm Test Result a b dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB 11 MAGNITUDE RATIO PHASE DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST Step Attenuator Calibration Value at 50 MHz Attenuationg A R Measurement 10 dB 20 dB 30 dB 40 dB 50 dB 60
16. 2 2 27 Test Equipment a a a a a 2 2 27 Procedure 2 27 10 ABSOLUTE AMPLITUDE ACCURACY TEST NA MM 2 31 Description 2 31 Specification 2 2 31 Test Equipment a a a a a 2 2 31 Procedure 2 31 11 MAGNITUDE RATIO PHASE DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST NA 2 36 Description 2 36 Specification 2 2 36 Test Equipment a a a a a 2 2 36 Procedure 2 37 12 MAGNITUDE RATIO PHASE FREQUENCY R RESPONSE TEST NA 2 45 Description 2 45 Specification 2 2 45 Test Equipment a a a a a 2 2 45 Procedure 2 45 13 DISPLAY ED AVERAGE NOISE LEVEL TEST SA MM 2 50 Description 2 50 Specification 2 2 50 Test Equipment a a a a a 2 2 50 Procedure 2 50 14 AMPLITUDE FIDELITY TEST SA MM 2 53 Description 2 53 Specification 2 2 53 Test Equipment a a a 2 2 53 e SE 2 54 INPUT ATTENUATOR SWITCHING UNCERTAINTY TEST SA 2 58 Description MEM 2 2 58 Specification 2 2 58 Test Equipment a a a 2 2 58 Procedure 2 58 16 NOISE SIDEBANDS TEST SA MM 2 61 Description 2 61 Specification 2 2 61 Test Equipment a a a 2 2 61 Contents 2 Proc
17. 0 0037 dB 0 0042 dB 0 0046 dB 0 0052 dB 0 0079 dB 0 0125 dB 0 0144 dB 0 0327 dB 0 0532 dB 0 0543 dB 0 0850 dB The calibration uncertainty is the primary source of measurement error in performance tests The measurement uncertainties listed in the performance test record of Chapter 4 are valid only when the uncertainty of the step attenuation data satisfies that given in the third column of Table 1 3 The calibration of step attenuators 8496G Opt 001 and H60 are available at Agilent Technologies For information about the calibration and the available uncertainties contact your nearest Agilent Technologies service center Note The 8496G Opt 001 and H60 programmable step attenuator has four attenuation segments 10 dB segment 20 dB segment and two 40 dB L segment that is used segments Each attenuation from 10 dB to 70 dB is obtained by combining these segments The attenuations from 40 dB to 70 dB depend on the 40 dB When setting the step attenuator for the calibration specify one of the 40 dB segments for attenuations from 40 dB to 70 dB Then use the specified segment in the tests General Information 1 7 Performance Tests INTRODUCTION This chapter contains the performance test procedures The test procedures listed in Table 1 1 are described sequentially in the following pages The test name indicates the tested performance and to which performa
18. 51 ToA53 DC DC EXT VF GSD FDD Converter ot 0 849 J11 J12 J16 414 8 A1 CPU 5VD GND 5VD LED Normally On J10 Motherboard J13 J17 To A30 53 Front FDD KBD Control 507020 Figure 7 7 A1 CPU Connector Locations c Turn the analyzer power on Look at the Al 5 VD LED m If the LED is still off the A1 CPU is probably faulty Replace the A1 CPU m If the LED goes on the A1 CPU is verified Continue with the next step d Turn the analyzer power off Reconnect the cable to the A1J10 Turn the analyzer power on Look at the A1 5 VD LED m If the 4 5 VD LED goes out the problem may be in the analog assemblies Continue with the next Remove Assemblies m If the 4 5 VD LED is still on continue with the next step e Reconnect one of the disconnected cables to its connector at a time Turn the analyzer power on after each cable is connected The assembly related with the cable turning the 5 VD LED off is probably faulty Replace the assembly 7 10 Power Supply Troubleshooting Remove Assemblies Turn the analyzer power off Remove the assemblies A2 A5 A8 and ABI Turn the analyzer power on Look at the A1 5 VD LE
19. 6 RBW 100 Hz Bw Avg RES BW 1 9 9 Video BW 100 Hz Bw Avg VIDEO BW 1 9 e Press Trigger SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep f Press Marker AMODE MENU AMKR SWP PARAM 3 0 to move the delta reference marker to the spurious frequency in the seventh column of Table 2 24 g Press Marker 0 1 to move the delta marker to the spurious frequency h Record the 4395A marker reading in the performance test record Test Result column 6 Change the signal generator and 4395A controls in accordance with Table 2 24 Then repeat step 4 and 5 for each setting 2 78 Performance Tests 21 RESIDUAL RESPONSE TEST SA Description This test connects a 50 terminator to the 4395A R input and measures the 4395A residual response at several frequencies where the response is most likely to be observed The residual response is any internally generated by mixing the harmonics of the first second local phase lock loop oscillators and the related reference signal Specification Residual response Greference value setting lt 40 dBm input att auto or 0 dB 108 dBm Test Equipment 500 termination 909C Opt 012 or part of 85032B Procedure 1 Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2 30 00000000 502026
20. 8491A Opt 006 amp Opt H60 1 Calibration values for attenuation settings of 10 dB to 50 dB at 50 MHz are required Procedure 1 Record the step attenuator 50 MHz calibration values in the calculation sheet Calibration Value column 2 Set the step attenuator to 40 dB 3 On the signal generator initialize the signal generator Then set the controls as follows Controls Settings Frequency 50 1 MHz Amplitude 12 dBm 4 Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2 22 Note Connect the signal generator s 10 MHz frequency reference output to the 4395A EXT REF Input on the rear panel as shown in Figure 2 22 With this 3 configuration both the signal generator and the 4395A are phase locked to the same reference frequency to obtain a stable measurement 2 58 Performance Tests BNC m BNC m Cable 122 TO FREQ REF Signal Generator Y OUTPUT 4395A coo co 000 C na 000 aan pop a O 29255 000 00000000 6dB Fixed Attenuation VSWR lt 1 015 6dB Fixed Attenuation N m N m VSWR x 1 015 Step Attenuator VSWR lt 1 02 CCS02033 Figure 2 22 Input Attenuator Accuracy Test Setup 5 Press Meas ANALYZER SPECTRUM ANALYZER to initialize the 4395A Then set the controls as follows Control
21. Check no error message displayed At the end of this test the analyzer returns the control settings to the default values power on reset If the test fails the analyzer displays an error messages for a few second before returning to the defaults m If no error message is displayed the volatile memories are verified Continue with the next Check the A30 Front Keyboard m If one of error messages listed below is displayed the A1 CPU is faulty Replace the A1 CPU CPU INTERNAL SRAM R W ERROR DSP SRAM R W ERROR DUAL PORT SRAM R W ERROR CPU BACKUP SRAM R W ERROR Digital Control Troubleshooting 8 9 5 Check the A30 Front Keyboard The A30 front keyboard can be checked using the external test 50 FRONT PANEL DIAG a Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 5 0 x1 EXECUTE TEST to run the external test 17 b Press all of the front panel keys The pressed abbreviated key name should be displayed at a key pressed When you rotate the RPG knob the RPG tuned direction CW or CCW and its response speed SLOW MID FAST should be displayed you can check every key on the A30 Keyboard except for PREsET If you want to exit this test press m If or more keys seems to be defective replace the A30 front keyboard m If all keys seem to be good the A30 front keyboard is verified Continue with the next Check the A53 FDD 6 Check the A53 FDD The A53 FDD Flexible Disk Drive can be chec
22. Error Messages in Numerical Order 0 100 0 No error The error queue is empty Every error in the queue has been read OUTPERRO query or the queue was cleared by power on or the CLS command 1 CANT SET RBW AUTO IN ZERO SPAN The RBW AUTO mode cannot be selected in the zero span The RBW must be specified manually in the zero span spectrum analyzer mode only 10 ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED Error correction for the selected calibration class cannot be computed until all the necessary standards have been measured 11 CALIBRATION REQUIRED No valid calibration coefficients were found when you attempted to turn calibration ON 12 NO CALIBRATION CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS The RESUME CAL SEQUENCE softkey is not valid unless a calibration is in progress Start a new calibration 13 CALIBRATION ABORTED The calibration in progress was terminated due to a change of the active channel or stimulus parameters 14 NOT VALID FOR PRESENT TEST SET The calibration requested is inconsistent with the test set present This message occurs in the following situations m A full 2 port calibration is requested with a test set other than an S parameter test set a A one path 2 port calibration is requested with an S parameter test set this procedure is typically used with a transmission reflection test set 15 EXCEEDED 7 STANDARDS PER CLASS A maximum of seven standards can be defined for any class 16 CURRENT PARAMETER IN CAL S
23. 4 V 0 4V 10 V 40 V DC Bias 100 mA 10 mA mA 20 pA 20 pA 1 mA 10 100 Test Result Test Measurement Limit 44 mV 14 mV 8 mV 4 mV 8 mV 14 mV NN A A A A 44 mV Test Result Test Limit 0 530 mA 0 080 mA 0 035 mA 0 035 mA 0 035 mA 0 035 mA 0 080 mA NAA A A A A A 0 530 mA Uncertainty 0 853 mV 0 378 mV 0 056 mV 0 023 mV 0 056 mV 0 378 mV 0 853 mV Measurement Uncertainty 0 163 mA 1 63 pA 0 163 pA 0 072 pA 0 072 pA 0 163 pA 1 63 pA 0 163 mA Performance Test Record 4 5 7 RECEIVER NOISE LEVEL TEST Frequency Input Test Result 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz 11 MHz 101 MHz 499 MHz 4 6 Performance Test Record R O gt Ww U JU gt WU gt U 7 JU 7 MJU gt W gt A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A AA CA A A A A Test Limit 85 dBm 85 dBm 85 dBm 85 dBm 85 dBm 85 dBm 85 dBm 85 dBm 85 dBm 115 0 dBm 115 0 dBm 115 0 dBm 115 0 dBm 115 0 dBm 115 0 dBm 114 9 dBm 114 9 dBm 114 9 dBm 114 0 dBm 114 0 dBm 114 0 dBm 110 5 dBm 110 5 dBm 110 5 dBm 8 INPUT CROSSTALK TEST 10 Hz lt Freq lt 1 kHz Measurement R into A Crosstalk R into B Crosstalk 1 kHz lt Freq lt 100 kHz Measurement R in
24. 410 Query INTERRUPTED A condition causing an interrupted query error occurred see IEEE 488 2 6 3 2 3 For example a query followed by DAB or GET before a response was completely sent 420 Query UNTERMINATED A condition causing an unterminated query error occurred see 488 2 6 3 2 2 For example the analyzer was addressed to talk and an incomplete program message was received by the controller 350 Queue overflow A specific code entered into the queue in lieu of the code that caused the error This code indicates that there is no room in the queue and an error occurred but was not recorded Messages 12 Error Messages in Alphabetical Order R 111 RECALL ERROR INSTR STATE PRESET serious error for example corrupted data is detected on recalling a file and this forced the analyzer to be PRESET 110 SAVE ERROR serious error for example physically damaged disk surface is detected on saving a file 76 SEGMENT START STOP OVERLAPPED Segments are not allowed to be overlapped Reenter appropriate value for start or stop value of segments to avoid that segment is not overlapped 330 Self test failed A self test failed Contact your nearest Agilent Technologies office or see the Service Manual for troubleshooting 221 Settings conflict A legal program data element was parsed but could not be executed due to the current device state see IEEE 488 2 6 4 5 3 and 11 5 1 1 5 128 SPAN
25. 1 R input level B input level for full scale input level 10 dB IFBW 10 Hz 23 5 At the following points measurement error may exceed the specifications 124 0 MHz 136 0 MHz 415 0 MHz Test Equipment Two Way Power Splitter Hh e 11667A Step Attenuator 10 dB Step VSWR lt 1 02 8496G Opt 001 and H60 Attenuator driver eh m nene 11713A 6 dB Fixed Attenuation two required 8491A Opt 006 6 dB Fixed Attenuation VSWR lt 1 015 two required 8491A Opt 006 amp Opt H60 Type N Cable 61 three required 11500B or part of 11851B N m N m adapter m enn PN 1250 1475 1 Calibration values for attenuation settings of 10 dB to 100 dB at 50 MHz are required 2 36 Performance Tests Procedure 1 Record the step attenuator 50 MHz calibration values in the calculation sheet Calibration Value column 2 Press Meas ANALYZER TYPE NETWORK ANALYZER to initialize the 4395A Then set the controls as follows Control Settings Key Strokes Dual Channel On Display DUAL CHAN on OFF Then the softkey label changes to DUAL CHAN ON off Marker DISCRETE Marker CONT Then the softkey label changes to MKR DISCRETE Start Frequency 3 MHz Start 3 Stop Frequency 50 1 MHz stop 5 C 1 IF BW
26. 11500B or part of 11851B N m N m adapter PN 1250 1475 BNC cable 122 em ciii PN 8120 1840 Procedure 1 Run the Adjustment Program 2 Select the IF BPF YL AT and press OK in the list box 3 Following the Adjustment Program instructions complete this procedure Signal Generator TO FREQ REF OUTPUT BNC m BNC m Cable 122 Power Meter 00000000 N m N m Adapter Power Sensor N m N m Cable Power Splitter CCS05006 Figure 5 18 IF BPF Flatness Adjustment Setup 5 30 Adjustments 15 DC Bias Adjustment Option 010 The purpose of this procedure is to adjust the DC Bias source Required Equipment Multimeter eaae hen 3458A BNC cable 61 PN 8120 1839 BNC f Dual Banana Plug Adapter PN 1251 2277 Procedure 1 Run the Adjustment Program 2 Select the CC DcBias and press in the list box 3 Following the Adjustment Program instructions complete this procedure Multimeter Banana P
27. 90 dB Measurement Magnitude Ratio Phase Magnitude Ratio Phase Magnitude Ratio Phase Magnitude Ratio Phase Magnitude Ratio Phase Magnitude Ratio Phase Magnitude Ratio Phase Magnitude Ratio Phase Magnitude Ratio Phase 100 dB Magnitude Ratio Phase Minimum Test Result Maximum Measurement Limit 0 40 dB 3 0 0 05 dB 0 3 0 05 dB 0 3 0 05 dB 0 3 0 05 dB 0 3 0 05 dB 0 3 0 3 dB 8 0 3 dB 8 3 0 dB 18 3 0 dB 18 1 Relative to full scale input level 4 12 Performance Test Record Limit 0 40 dB 3 0 0 05 dB 0 3 0 05 dB 0 3 0 05 dB 0 3 0 05 dB 0 3 0 05 dB 0 3 0 3 dB 1 8 0 3 dB 1 8 3 0 dB 18 3 0 dB 18 Uncertainty 0 0120 dB 0 0665 0 0100 dB 0 0664 0 0101 dB 0 0664 0 0109 dB 0 0664 0 0127 dB 0 0664 0 0135 dB 0 0664 0 0238 dB 0 0664 0 0178 dB 0 0664 0 0374 dB 0 0664 0 0575 dB 0 0664 12 MAGNITUDE RATIO PHASE FREQUENCY RESPONSE TEST A R Measurement Measurement Minimum Test Result Maximum Limit Limit Magnitude Ratio 2 dB 2 dB Phase 12 12 B R Measurement Measurement Minimum Test Result Maximum Limit Limit Magnitude Ratio 2 dB 2 dB Phase 12 12 13 DISPLAYED AVERAGE NOISE LEVEL TEST Input R Frequency Test Result Test Limit 1 kHz 120 dBm Hz 10 kHz 120 dBm Hz 100 kHz
28. Press Trigger SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep m Set the 4395A controls as follows Control Settings Key Strokes 2 48 Performance Tests Active Channel CH 1 Ch 1 Data Math DATA MEM Display DATA MATH DATA MEM GAIN Q 5 3 Auto Scale Scale Ref AUTO SCALE Active Channel CH 2 ch 2 Data Math DATA MEM Display DATA MATH DATA MEM GAIN Q 5 3 Auto Scale Scale Ref AUTO SCALE Press ch 1 Search MAX and Search MIN to move the channel 1 marker to the maximum and minimum points on the trace Compare the absolute values at the maximum and minimum points Record the larger value in the performance test record Test Result column for A R magnitude ratio Press ch 2 Marke MKR STOP Cal MORE ELECTRICAL DELAY MENU MKR DELAY ELECTRICAL DELAY Then press or and turn the RPG knob to vary the electrical delay until the trace is in the most horizontal position Press PHASE OFFSET and enter the trace mean value using numeric keys The trace mean value is displayed as a marker statistic mean in the upper right hand corner of the display Press Search and Search MIN to move the channel 2 marker to the maximum and minimum points on the trace Compare the absolute values at the maximum and minimum points Record the larger value in the performance test record Test Result column for A R phase Perform
29. 10 Hz 15 Hz 25 Hz 40 Hz 80 Hz 100 Hz 200 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 2 kHz 5 kHz 10 kHz 20 kHz 50 kHz 100 kHz 200 kHz 500 kHz 4395A Reading c Test Result c 20 dBm ref dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB function generator 4395A 4395A Power Meter Frequency Reading 1 Reading 1 1 2 50 MHz dBm dBm 3 22 Calculation Sheet 4395A Reading 2 r3 dBm is 20 dBm 20 dBm is the output level of the Power Meter Reading 2 4 dBm Test Result ref r1 r2 r3 r4 2 dB At Frequencies gt 1 MHz 4395A Frequency 1 MHz 2 MHz 5 MHz 8 MHz 10 20 MHz 100 MHz 125 MHz 150 MHz 175 MHz 200 MHz 225 MHz 250 MHz 275 MHz 300 MHz 325 MHz 350 MHz 315 MHz 400 MHz 425 MHz 450 MHz 415 MHz 500 MHz 4395A Power Meter 4395A Power Meter Reading 1 Reading 1 Reading 2 Reading 2 at b1 a2 2 dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm d
30. 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 3 4 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 7 1 kHz lt Freq lt 100 kHz 100 kHz Freq 500 MHz 9 INPUT IMPEDANCE TEST 100 kHz Freq 100 MHz 100 MHz Freq 500 MHz 10 ABSOLUTE AMPLITUDE ACCURACY TEST Input Input Input B 11 MAGNITUDE RATIO PHASE I DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST A R Measurement LL B R Measurement 12 MAGNITUDE RATIO PHASE FREQUENCY RESPONSE TEST A R Measurement B R Measurement 13 DISPLAYED AVERAGE NOISE LEVEL TEST Input Input Input B 14 AMPLITUDE FIDELITY TEST Input Input A B INPUT ATTENUATOR SWITCHING UNCERTAINTY TEST ut R Input Input B 16 NOISE SIDEBANDS TEST Input 17 AMPLITUDE ACCURACY FREQUENCY RESPONSE TEST Input R Level Accuracy Frequency Response Input Level Accuracy Frequency Response Input B Level Accuracy Frequency Response 18 SECOND HARMONIC DISTORTION TEST E 19 THIRD ORDER INTERMODULATION DISTORTION TEST 20 OTHER SPURIOUS TEST 21 RESIDUAL RESPONSE TEST 4 7 4 7 4 7 4 7 4 7 4 8 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 13 4 13 4 13 4 13 4 14 4 14 4 14 4 15 4 15 4 15 4 16 4 16 4 16 4 16 4 17 4 17 4 18 4 18 4 18 4 18 4 19 4 19 4 20 4 21 4 21 4 22 4 23 4 23 4 24 4 24 Contents 5 5 Adjustments Introduction 5 1 Safety Considerations ONE 5 1 Required Controller MM 5 2 Windo
31. 0 Input Attenuator A 10 dB Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN 1 9 a Input Attenuator B 10 dB Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN B 1 1 2 AJR Magnitude Ratio Phase Frequency Response Test a Connect the test equipment as shown in setup 1 of Figure 2 18 Performance Tests 2 45 00000000 00000000 N m N m Adapter N m N m Adapter Power Splitter Power Splitter N m N m Cable N m N m Cable CCS02016 SETUP 1 SETUP 2 Figure 2 18 A R Magnitude Ratio Phase Frequency Response Test Setup b Set the 4395A controls as follows Control Settings Key Strokes Active Channel CH 1 Input Port A R Meas Format LOG MAG Format LOG MAG Active Channel CH 2 Input Port A R Meas Format PHASE Format PHASE Start Frequency 1 MHz Start Stop Frequency 500 MHz stop 5 9 0 Number of Points 500 Sweep NUMBER of POINTS 5 0 C Press Trigger SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep d Set the 4395A controls as follows Control Settings Key Strokes Active Channel CH 1 ch 1 Data Memory Display DATA MEMORY Active Channel CH 2 ch 2 Data Memory Display DATA MEMORY e Reverse
32. 0 ONLY The setup must be zero span and spectrum analyzer mode when turning on the RF OUTPUT 150 String data error This error as well as errors 151 and 158 are generated when analyzing the syntax of a string data element This particular error message is used if the analyzer cannot detect a more specific error 158 String data not allowed string data element was encountered but was not allowed by the analyzer at this point in parsing 130 Suffix error This error as well as errors 131 through 139 are generated when parsing a suffix This particular error message is used if the analyzer cannot detect a more specific error Messages 13 Error Messages in Alphabetical Order 138 Suffix not allowed A suffix was encountered after a numeric element that does not allow suffixes 134 Suffix too long The suffix contained more than 12 characters see IEEE 488 2 7 7 3 4 102 Syntax error unrecognized command or data type was encountered For example a string was received when the analyzer was not expecting to receive a string 310 System error Some error termed system error by the analyzer has occurred 124 Too many digits The mantissa of a decimal numeric data element contains more than 255 digits excluding leading zeros see IEEE 488 2 7 7 2 4 1 77 MANY SEGMENTS OR POINTS Frequency list mode is limited to 31 segments or 801 points 64 MA
33. 10 11 10 12 10 13 10 14 10 15 10 16 10 17 10 18 10 19 10 20 10 21 10 22 10 23 10 24 10 25 10 26 10 27 10 28 10 29 10 30 10 31 10 32 10 33 10 34 10 35 10 36 10 37 10 35 10 39 10 40 10 41 10 42 10 43 10 44 10 45 10 46 10 47 10 48 11 1 1 2 3 4 A 5 A 6 8 9 10 Angle Assembly Parts 5 5 Front Assembly Parts 1 8 Front Assembly Parts 2 8 Front Assembly Parts 3 8 Front Assembly Parts 4 8 Front Assembly Parts 5 8 Front Assembly Parts 6 8 Front Assembly Parts 7 8 Front Assembly Parts 8 8 Rear Assembly Parts 1 8 Rear Assembly Parts 2 8 Rear Assembly Parts 3 8 Rear Assembly Parts 4 8 Rear Assembly Parts 5 8 Rear Assembly Parts Opt 1D5 6 8 Rear Assembly Parts 7 8 Rear Assembly Parts 8 8 Main Frame Assembly Parts 1 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts 2 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts FDD Assembly 3 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts FDD Assembly 4 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts 5 23 SE Main Frame Assembly Parts 6 23 Frame Assembly Parts 20 Motherboard Assembly im Main Frame Assembly Parts 8 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts 9 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts A1 CPU Board Assembly 10 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts 11 23 EEE Main Frame Assembly Parts 12 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts 9 Input Multiplexer Assembly 13 28 Main Frame Assembly Parts 14 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts 15
34. 50dBm 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 082 dB 4 POWER SWEEP LINEARITY TEST STOP Power Source Minimum Test Result Maximum Measurement Power Limit Limit Uncertainty 30 dBm 35 dBm 0 5 dB 0 5 dB 0 095 dB 40 dBm 0 5 dB 0 5 dB 0 095 dB 45 dBm 0 5 dB 0 5 dB 0 095 dB 50 dBm 0 5 dB 0 5 dB 0 095 dB 15 dBm 10 dBm 0 5 dB 0 5 dB 0 071 dB 5dBm 0 5 dB 0 5 dB 0 071 dB 0dBm 0 5 dB 0 5 dB 0 071 dB 5 dBm 0 5 dB 0 5 dB 0 071 dB Performance Test Record 4 3 5 HARMONICS NON HARMONIC SPURIOUS TEST Harmonics Frequency Harmonics Test Result Test Limit Measurement Frequency Uncertainty 10 kHz 20 kHz lt 30dBc 1 68 dB 30 kHz lt 30dBc 1 66 dB 500 kHz 1 MHz lt 30dBc 1 68 dB 1 5 MHz lt 30dBc 1 66 dB 10 MHz 20 MHz lt 30 dBc 1 65 dB 30 MHz lt 30 dBc 51 65 dB 100MHz 200 MHz lt 30 dBc 51 65 dB 300 MHz lt 30 dBc 51 65 dB 250 MHz 500 MHz lt 30 dBc 3 53 dB 150 MHz lt 30 dBc 3 53 dB 500 MHz 1 GHz lt 30 dBc 3 53 dB 1 5 GHz lt 30 dBc 3 53 dB Non Harmonic Spurious Frequency Non Harmonic Test Result Test Limit Measurement Frequency Uncertainty 10 Hz 830 00001 MHz lt 30 dBc 3 53 dB 230 MHz 600 MHz lt 30 dBc 3 53 dB 330 MHz 500 MHz lt 30 dBc 3 53 dB 430 MHz 400 MHz lt 30 dBc 3 53 dB 500 MHz 330 MHz lt 30 dBc 3 53 dB 4 4 Performance Test Record 6 DC BIAS ACCURACY TEST DC Bias 40 V 10
35. firmware diskette 3 5 inch that contains the analyzer s firmware is required for the firmware installation If you do not have a firmware diskette you must order one For ordering information contact your nearest Agilent Technologies service center and provide the revision of the analyzer s firmware The part number of the firmware diskette depends on the firmware revision The firmware revision of the analyzer is indicated on the revision label attached on the rear panel as shown in Figure 8 3 Firmware Rev 01 00 CCS08009 Figure 8 3 Firmware Revision Label Installing the Firmware Perform the following procedure to install the firmware into the analyzer 1 Turn the analyzer power off 2 Press both the Start and Preset keys While pressing both keys turn the analyzer power on 3 Wait until the bootloader menu appears on the LCD as shown in Figure 8 4 8 4 Digital Control Troubleshooting Hi 4395A 10Hz 500MHz 10Hz 500MHz 100kHz 500MHz NETWORK SPECTRUM MPEDANCE ANALYZER SYSTEM c Copyright 1992 1997 2000 UPDATE Agilent Technologies Inc SYSTEM Rights Reserved BACKUP BootLoader REV N NN MMM DD YYYY Current Firmwave Revision 4395A REV N NN MMM DD YYYY PREVIEW DISK Select Softkey REBOOT CCS08013 Figure 8 4 Bootloader Menu Display
36. gt 1 MHz Receiver Attenuator Adjustment Setup IF BPF Flatness Adjustment Setup DC Bias Adjustment Setup 1 DC Bias Adjustment Setup 2 Troubleshooting Organization Power Supply Lines Simplified Block Diagram A50 SHUTDOWN LED Location Dl 1 5 VD LED Location Removing Line Fuse A1 CPU Connector Locations A40J1 Output Voltage A1 CPU Connector Locations Fan Troubleshooting Setup A50 DC DC Converter Troubleshooting Setup Digital Control Group Simplified Block Diagram Al EEPROM Location Firmware Revision Label Bootloader Menu Display Al Fight LEDs Pattern Bootloader Display Probe Power Connector Voltages Top View Major Assemblies Bottom View Major Assemblies Angle Assembly Parts 1 5 Angle Assembly Parts 2 5 Angle Assembly Parts Opt 001 3 5 Angle Assembly Parts 4 5 Angle Assembly Parts 5 5 Front Assembly Parts 1 8 Front Assembly Parts 2 8 Front Assembly Parts 3 8 Front Assembly Parts 4 8 Front Assembly Parts 5 8 Front Assembly Parts 6 8 Front Assembly Parts 7 8 Front Assembly Parts 8 8 Rear Assembly Parts 1 8 Rear Assembly Parts 2 8 Rear Assembly Parts 3 8 Rear Assembly Parts 4 8 Rear Assembly Parts 5 8 Rear Assembly Parts Opt 105 6 8 Rear Assembly Parts 7 8 Rear Assembly Parts 8 8 Main Frame Assembly Parts 1 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts 2 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts FDD Assembly 3 23 5 24 5 25 5 27 5 28 5 29 5 30
37. on the A9 Input Multiplexer Board until pass is displayed on the Screen Press CONT to exit the adjustment Press 6 1 or use to select the internal adjustment test 61 A9 B ON ADJ 10 Press EXECUTE TEST to run the test Adjust ADJ B ON on the A9 Input Multiplexer Board until pass is displayed on the screen Press CONT to exit the adjustment Press 6 2 or use to select the internal adjustment test 62 A9 R OFF ADJ Press EXECUTE TEST to run the test Adjust ADJ R OFF on the A9 Input Multiplexer Board until pass is displayed on the screen Press CONT to exit the adjustment Press 6 G or use f to select the internal adjustment test 63 A9 A OFF ADJ Press EXECUTE TEST to run the test Adjust ADJ A OFF on the A9 Input Multiplexer Board until pass is displayed on the Screen Press CONT to exit the adjustment 5 16 Adjustments 21 22 23 24 25 Screen Press EXECUTE TEST to run the test Press CONT to exit the adjustment Turn the 4395A OFF and install the bottom cover Press 6 4 or use 1 to select the internal adjustment test 64 A9 B OFF ADJ Adjust ADJ B OFF on the A9 Input Multiplexer Board until pass is displayed on the ADJ B OFF ADJ B ON ADJ A OFF ADJ A ON ADJ R OFF 505017 Figure 5 8 Input DC Offset Adjustment Location Adjustments 5 17 7 Input Local Null Adjustment The p
38. positive negative positive part of polystyrene porcelain position s potentiometer peak to peak point peak working voltage rectifier radio frequency round head or right hand rack mount only root mean square reverse working voltage slow blow screw selenium section s semiconductor silicon silver slide spring special stainless steel split ring steel tantalum time delay toggle thread titanium tolerance trimmer traveling wave tube micro variable dc working volts with 1 watts working inverse voltage wirewound without Replaceable Parts 10 3 A40 506016 50 A2 Option 001 A5 LL A8 10 4 Replaceable Parts Figure 10 1 Top View Major Assemblies Table 10 3 Top View Major Assemblies Ref Agilent Part C Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number A2 E4970 66502 9 1 DC BIAS Opt 001 28
39. 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB Uncertainty 0 17 dB 0 17 dB 0 17 dB 0 17 dB 0 17 dB 0 17 dB 0 17 dB 0 17 dB 0 17 dB 0 17 dB 0 17 dB 0 18 dB 0 20 dB 0 20 dB 0 20 dB 0 20 dB 0 20 dB 0 20 dB 0 20 dB 0 21 dB 0 23 dB 0 23 dB 0 23 dB 0 23 dB 0 23 dB 0 23 dB 0 23 dB 0 23 dB 0 23 dB 0 23 dB 0 23 dB 0 23 dB Performance Test Record 4 9 Input B Frequency Mimimum Test Result Maximum Measurement Limit Limit Uncertainty 100Hz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 17 dB 200 Hz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 17 dB 500 Hz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 17 dB 1kHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 17 dB 2kHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 17 dB 5kHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 17 dB 10kHz 1 5dB 1 5 dB 0 17 dB 20 kHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 17 dB 50 kHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 17 dB 100kHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 17 dB 200kHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 17 dB 500 kHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 18 dB 1 MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 20 dB 2 MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 20 dB 5 MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 20 dB 8 MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 20 dB 10MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 20 dB 20 MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 20 dB 50 MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 20 dB 100 MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 21 dB 125 MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 23 dB 175 MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 23 dB 200MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 23 dB 225 MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 23 dB 275 MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 23 dB 300MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 23 dB 325 MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 23 dB 375 MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 23 dB 400 MHz 1 5 d
40. 2 14 dB 21 RESIDUAL RESPONSE TEST Frequency Test Result Test Limit 100 18333 MHz lt 108 dBm 166 85 MHz lt 108 dBm 233 5166667 MHz lt 108 dBm 366 85 MHz lt 108 dBm 433 5166667 MHz lt 108 dBm 161 75 MHz lt 108 dBm 361 75 MHz lt 108 dBm 377 05 MHz lt 108 dBm 177 05 MHz lt 108 dBm 438 6166667 MHz lt 108 dBm 371 95 MHz lt 108 dBm 238 6166667 MHz lt 108 dBm 171 95 MHz lt 108 dBm 105 2833333 MHz lt 108 dBm 4 24 Performance Test Record Adjustments Introduction This section describes the Adjustments required for the 4395A to operate within its specifications These adjustments should be performed along with periodic maintenance to keep the 4395A in optimum operating condition The recommended calibration period is 12 months If proper performance cannot be achieved after the Adjustments see the Troubleshooting chapter Note ensure proper results and correct instrument operation Agilent Technologies suggests a 30 minute warm up and stabilization period before 3 performing any of the following Adjustments Safety Considerations This manual contains NOTEs CAUTIONs and WARNINGs which must be followed to ensure the safety of the operator and to keep the instrument in a safe and serviceable condition The adjustments must be performed by qualified service personnel Warning Any interruption of the protective ground conductor i
41. 225 Data out of memory The analyzer has insufficient memory to perform the requested operation Messages 4 Error Messages in Alphabetical Order 222 Data out of range legal program data element was parsed but could not be executed because the interpreted value was outside the legal range as defined by the analyzer see IEEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 5 231 Data questionable Indicates that measurement accuracy is suspect 104 Data type error The parser recognized an unallowed data element For example numeric or string data was expected but block data was encountered 137 DC CURRENT LIMIT OCCURED The output current at DC SOURCE port is reached to an upper limit and the output voltage is reduced so that the current does not exceed the upper limit This message appears when the DC SOURCE port is used in voltage control mode 136 DC SOURCE OVERLOAD The DC SOURCE output is overloded 138 DC VOLTAGE LIMIT OCCURED The output voltage at DC SOURCE port is reached to an upper limit and the output current is reduced so that the voltage does not exceed the upper limit This message appears when the DC SOURCE port is used in current control mode 37 DISPLAY BUFFER IS FULL The display buffer is filled with the overlay traces or traces drawn by IBASIC DRAW MOVE commands etc 117 DUPLICATE FILE EXTENSION The extension name entered is already used for other file types Use other extension name E 15 EXCEEDED 7 STANDARDS PER
42. 5 VD Supply 33 A8 5 V Supply 34 A8 15 V Supply 35 8 43 3 V Supply 36 8 ADC Reference Voltage 37 A8 25 MHz Cloc 1 tt 38 8 Decimated Clock 1 tt 39 A8 Dither 40 8 Board ID 1 ttt 41 A9 5 V Supply 1 11 42 A9 5 Supply 1 11 43 A9 415 V Supply 1 11 44 A9 15 V Supply 1 11 45 A9 Board ID 1 ttt Troubleshooting 6 7 ttf Most suspicious assembly and should be checked repalced tt Suspicious assembly and should be checked T There is some possibility of a fault External Tests Failure Troubleshooting If you can t identify the faulty assembly using the internal tests you can execute the external tests in addition to the internal tests These external tests are also built in tests and 10 tests are available in the 4395A service mode Refer to the Table 6 2 to know which assembly is probable faulty and should be replaced execute the external tests perform the following procedures a Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE TESTS Pressing EXTERNAL TESTS jumps to the first test external test test 50 FRONT PANEL DIAG b Select the test using the RPG knob IL keys or ENTRY keys c Press EXECUTE TEST to execute the specifyed test d Wait until the test result PASS or FAIL is displayed Table 6 2 Troubleshooting Information for External Test Failure Test Failed Test Probable Faulty Assembly No Al A20 A30 A832 A38 40 1 2 7 50 FRONT PANEL
43. Figure 2 30 Residual Response Test Setup Performance Tests 2 79 2 Press Meas ANALYZER TYPE SPECTRUM ANALYZER Preset to initialize the 4395A Then set the controls as follows Control Settings Key Strokes Input Port R Meas R Frequency Span 2 24 kHz Span 2 2 4 RBW 3 Hz Bw Avg RES BW 3 x1 Reference Level 50 dBm Scale Ref REFERENCE VALUE 2 5 0 a Input Attenuator R 0 dB Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN R 0 a 3 Set the center frequency to the first frequency 100 18333 MHz in Table 2 25 Table 2 25 Residual Response Test Settings 4395A Center Frequency 100 18333 MHz 166 85 MHz 233 5166667 MHz 366 85 MHz 433 5166667 MHz 161 75 MHz 361 75 MHz 377 05 MHz 177 05 MHz 438 6166667 MHz 371 95 MHz 238 6166667 MHz 171 95 MHz 105 2833333 MHz 4 Perform the following steps to measure the residual response a Press Trigger SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep b Press Search MAX to move the marker to the maximum point on the trace c Record the marker reading in the performance test record Test Result column 5 Change the 4395A center frequency in accordance with Table 2 25 Repeat step 4 for each setting 2 80 Performance Tests Calculation Sheet INTRODUCTION This chapter contains calculation sheets for each performance test that requires additional calculations to determine the fi
44. If the analyzer has passed all of the checks but it still making incorrect measurements or unexpected operations suspect the accessories Accessories such as RF or interconnect cables calibration and verification kit devices test set can all induce system problems Configure the system as it is normally used and reconfirm the problem Continue with the Accessories Troubleshooting chapter Troubleshooting 6 3 INSPECT THE POWER ON SEQUENCE Check the Fan Turn the analyzer power on Inspect the fan on the rear panel m The fan should be rotating and audible If case of unexpected results check AC line power to the analyzer Check the fuse rating listed on the rear panel Check the line voltage setting For setting the line voltage see the Power Requirements in Appendix C If the problem persists continue with the Power Supply Troubleshooting chapter Check the Front Panel LEDs and Displays Turn on the analyzer and watch for the following events in this order 1 Beep is sounding 2 The chi LED turns on and the analyzer displays Internal Test In Progress for several seconds 3 The analyzer displays the graticule If case of unexpected results continue with Digital Control Troubleshooting chapter Check Error Message Turn the analyzer power on Inspect the LCD No error message should be displayed If the following status annotation appears on the LCD the A1 CPU is suspected Continue with the Digital Control Troubl
45. Source POWER C 2 1 Active Channel CH 1 Ch 1 Input Port B R Meas B R Format LOG MAG Format LOG MAG Averaging Factor 4 Ew Avg AVERAGING FACTOR 4 x1 Averaging ON Bw Avg AVERAGING on OFF Then the softkey label changes to AVERAGING ON off Input Attenuator 0dB Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN R 0 a Input Attenuator B 0dB Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN 0 a Active Channel CH 2 Ch 2 Input Port B R Meas B R Format PHASE Format PHASE Averaging Factor 4 Bw Avg AVERAGING FACTOR 4 a Averaging ON AVERAGING on OFF Then the softkey label changes to AVERAGING ON off c Set the step attenuator to 0 dB Performance Tests 2 41 d Press ca CALIBRATE MENU RESPONSE THRU to perform the response THRU calibration Wait for the completion of the sweep Then press DONE RESPONSE e Set the step attenuator to the first setting 10 dB in the second column of Table 2 16 Table 2 16 B R Dynamic Accuracy Test Settings 1 4395A Step Attenuator 4395A Input Level Source Power 0 dB 10 dB 8 dBm f On the 4395A press Source POWER 8 to set the source power to the first setting in the third columns of Table 2 14 g Perform the following steps to measure the dynamic accuracy 1 iv Record the channel 2 marker reading directly in the performance test record Use Press Trigger NUMBER OF GROUPS 5 1 to make a sweep Wait
46. The switching uncertainty is referenced to the 10 dB attenuator setting In this test a 50 1 MHz CW signal is applied to the 4395A input through a step attenuator The signal amplitude is measured at each 4395A input attenuator setting At each measurement the other measurement conditions are kept constant to measure the switching uncertainty exclusively The applied signal level is controlled using the step attenuator so as to keep the signal level input to the first mixer the internal circuit stage following the input attenuator constant For example the step attenuator is decreased by 10 dB when the 4395A input attenuator is increased by 10 dB The 4395A reference level is set to the value of the input attenuator setting 40 dB This keeps the 4395A internal IF gain constant Specification input attenuator switching uncertainty Q0 dB to 30 dB referenced to 10 dB lt 1 0 dB 40 dB to 50 dB referenced to 10 dB lt 1 5 dB Test Equipment Signal Generator e eme ee he heme 8663A Step Attenuator 10 dB step VSWR lt 1 02 8496G Opt 001 and H60 Attenuator driver aaa eere 11713A Type N Cable 61 two required 11500B or part of 11851B BNC cable 122 em hr PN 8120 1840 6 dB Fixed Attenuation VSWR lt 1 015 two required
47. Therefore each signal at the specified power level of 36 dBm is applied to the input mixer through the 4395A s 10 dB input attenuator Specification Third order inter modulation distortion separation gt 100kHz lt 70 dBc 1 two tones input with full scall input level 16 dB Test Equipment Signal Generator e nme eem ee 8663A Signal Generator n n e 8642B Power Meter 436A Opt 022 437B or 438A Power Sensor m eee ee e eh 8482A Two Way Power Splitter heh 11667A T R Test Sets e e eee meme eene 85044A 500 Termination 909C Opt 012 or part of 85032B Type N Cable 61 cm three required 11500B or part of 11851B BNC cable 122 cm two required PN 8120 1840 N m N m adapter ee een PN 1250 1475 APCT 5 N f adapter 11524A or part of 85032B Tee BNC m f f adapter PN 1250 0781 Procedure 1 Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2 28 Note Connect the signal generator s 10 MHz frequency reference output to the 4395A EXT REF
48. block data element This particular error message is used if the analyzer cannot detect a more specific error 161 Invalid block data block data element was expected but was invalid for some reason see IEEE 488 2 7 7 6 2 For example an END message was received before the length was satisfied 168 Block data not allowed legal block data element was encountered but was not allowed by the analyzer at this point in parsing 200 Execution error This is the generic syntax error that the analyzer cannot detect more specific errors This code indicates only that an execution error as defined in IEEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 5 has occurred 201 300 210 Trigger error trigger related error occurred This error message is used when the analyzer cannot detect the more specific errors described for errors 211 through 219 211 Trigger ignored GET TRG or triggering signal was received and recognized by the analyzer but was ignored because of analyzer timing considerations For example the analyzer was not ready to respond 213 Init ignored request for a measurement initiation was ignored as another measurement was already in progress 220 Parameter error Indicates that a program data element related error occurred This error message is used when the analyzer cannot detect the more specific errors described for errors 221 through 229 221 Settings conflict legal program
49. dB from Step Attenuator Reference Input Level 10 dB 20 dB 20 dB 30 dB 30 dB 40 dB 40 dB 50 dB 50 dB 60 dB 60 dB 70 dB 70 dB 80 dB f Perform the following steps to measure the amplitude fidelity i Press Trigger SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep ii Press Search iii Record the delta marker reading in the calculation sheet for the amplitude fidelity Use the 4395A Reading column corresponding to the dB from the reference level in the first column of Table 2 19 g Change the step attenuator setting in accordance with the second column of Table 2 19 Then perform step 8 f for each setting Remove the fixed attenuation from the R input and connect it to the input 10 Press Meas to set the 4395A to the A input Press Scale Ref REFERENCE VALUE C 1 x1 Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN 1 0 x1 to set the 4395A controls to the reference setting for the test Set the step attenuator to 10 dB Repeat step 8 to measure the amplitude fidelity at the 4395A input Remove the fixed attenuation from the input and connect it to the B input Press Meas to set the 4395A to the B input Performance Tests 2 55 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Press Scale Ref REFERENCE VALUE 2 1 0 Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN 1 x1 to se
50. order a part not listed in the replaceable parts table include the instrument model number the description and function of the part and the quantity of parts required Address the order to the nearest Agilent Technologies office Direct Mail Order System Within the USA Agilent Technologies can supply parts through a direct mail order system Advantages of using this system are 1 Direct ordering and shipment from the Agilent Technologies Parts Center in Mountain View California 2 No maximum or minimum on any mail order there is a minimum order amount for parts ordered through a local Agilent Technologies office when the orders require billing and invoicing 3 Prepaid transportation there is a small handling charge for each order 4 No invoices provide these advantages a check or money order must accompany each order Mail order forms and specific ordering information are available through your local Agilent Technologies office addresses and phone numbers are located at the back of this manual Replaceable Parts 10 1 Exchange Assemblies Under the rebuilt exchange assembly program certain factory repaired and tested assemblies are available on a trade in basis These assemblies are offered at lower cost than a new assembly while meeting all of the factory specifications required of a new assembly Replaceable Parts List Replaceable parts tables list the following information for each part 1 2 3
51. set the controls as follows the first setting in Table 2 23 Control Settings Key Strokes Center Frequency 10 Hz Center 1 9 Frequency Span 10 Hz Span 1 0 RBW 1 He RES Perform the following steps to measure the frequency response at frequencies lt 1 MHz Press Trigger SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep b Press Search SEARCH PEAK to place the marker at the peak of the carrier c Record the marker reading in the calculation sheet for frequencies 1 MHz Change the function generator frequency 4395A center frequency span frequency and RBW in accordance with Table 2 23 Repeat step 4 for each setting Remove the BNC cable from the R input and connect it to the input Press Meas to set the 4395A to the input Repeat steps 4 through 5 to measure the amplitude frequency response at the input Remove the BNC cable from the input and connect it to the B input 10 Press Meas to set the 4395A to the B input Repeat steps 4 through 5 to measure the amplitude frequency response at the input Calculate the test results using the equation given in the calculation sheet Record the test results in the performance test record Performance Tests 18 SECOND HARMONIC DISTORTION TEST SA Description This test measures the second harmonics level generated within the 4395A at a frequency of 50 1 MHz in the 43
52. using the equation given in the calculation sheet Record the test results dBm in the performance test record Performance Tests 2 23 8 INPUT CROSSTALK TEST NA Description This test measures the crosstalk signal leakage interference between two inputs of the 4395A R A and B inputs when RF OUT signal is supplied to one input and the other is terminated Specification Input crosstalk R to B GR port att 20 dB 10 dBm input amp B port att 0 dB freq lt 100 KHZ 100 dB freq gt 100 kHz lt 120 dB Test Equipment Type N Cable 61 cm 11500B or part of 11851B 509 Termination two required 909C Opt 012 or part of 85032B Procedure 1 Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2 10 00000000 N m N m Cable 500 Termination CCS02007 Figure 2 10 Input Crosstalk Test Setup 2 Press Meas ANALYZER TYPE NETWORK ANALYZER Preset to initialize the 4395A Then set the controls as follows Control Settings Key Strokes Dual Channel On Display DUAL CHAN on OFF Then the softkey label changes to DUAL CHAN ON off 2 24 Performance Tests Active Channel CH 1 Ch 1 Input Port Meas A R Format LOG MAG Format
53. 10 Hz Bw Avg IF BW 1 Number of Points 2 Sweep NUMBER of POINTS 2 a 3 A R Dynamic Accuracy Test Magnitude Ratio at 50 MHz and Phase at 3 MHz a Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2 14 00000000 N m N m Adapter Power Splitter o 6dB Fixed Attenuation N m N m Cable a 6dB Fixed Attenuation Step Attenuator VSWR lt 1 02 Figure 2 14 A R Magnitude Ratio Phase Dynamic Accuracy Test Setup 1 b On the 4395A set the controls as follows Performance Tests 2 37 2 38 Control Settings Source Power 2 dBm Active Channel CH 1 Input Port A R Format LOG MAG Averaging Factor 4 Averaging ON Input Attenuator R 0d B Input Attenuator A 0dB Active Channel CH 2 Input Port A R Format PHASE Averaging Factor 4 Averaging ON Set the step attenuator to 0 dB Key Strokes suce POWER C Meas A R Format LOG MAG Bw Avg AVERAGING FACTOR 4 Bw Avg AVERAGING on OFF Then the softkey label changes to AVERAGING ON off Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN R 0 x1 Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN A 0 E Meas A R Format PHASE Bw Avg AVERAGING FACTOR 4 x1 AVERAGING on OFF Then the sof
54. 133 dBm Hz 1 MHz 133 dBm Hz 11 MHz 145 dBm Hz 20 MHz 145 dBm Hz 101 MHz 144 dBm Hz 201 MHz 143 dBm Hz 499 MHz 140 dBm Hz Performance Test Record 4 13 Input Frequency 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz 11 MHz 20 101 MHz 201 MHz 499 MHz Input B Frequency 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz 11 MHz 20 MHz 101 MHz 201 MHz 499 MHz Test Result Test Result A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Test Limit 120 dBm Hz 120 dBm Hz 133 dBm Hz 133 dBm Hz 145 dBm Hz 145 dBm Hz 144 dBm Hz 143 dBm Hz 140 dBm Hz Test Limit 120 dBm Hz 120 dBm Hz 133 dBm Hz 133 dBm Hz 145 dBm Hz 145 dBm Hz 144 dBm Hz 143 dBm Hz 140 dBm Hz 14 AMPLITUDE FIDELITY TEST 4 14 Performance Test Record Input dB from Minimum Limit Test Result Maximum Limit Measurement Reference Input Level Uncertainty 10 dB 0 05 dB 0 05 dB 0 011 dB 10 dB 0 05 dB 0 05 dB 0 011 dB 20 dB 0 05 dB 0 05 dB 0 012 dB 30 dB 0 07 dB 0 07 dB 0 012 dB 40 dB 0 15 dB 0 15 dB 0 014 dB 50 dB 0 35 dB 0 35 dB 0 015 dB 60 dB 0 8 dB 0 8 dB 0 024 dB 70 dB 1 8 dB 1 8 dB 0 037 dB Input A dB from Minimum Limit Test Result Maximum Limit Measurement Reference Input Level Uncertainty 10 dB 0 05 dB 0 05 dB 0 011 dB 10 dB 0 05 dB 0 05 dB 0 011 dB 20 dB 0 05 dB 0 05 dB 0 012
55. 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts Pre regulator Assembly 16 23 Frame Assembly Parts A5 and A7 Assemblies 18 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts 2 DC Bias Assembly 19 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts YTO Assembly 20 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts YTO Assembly 21 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts YTO Assembly 22 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts 23 23 SE Post Repair Procedures Manual Changes by Serial Number Manual Changes by Firmware Version Front Assembly Parts 3 7 Front Assembly Parts 4 7 Front Assembly Parts 5 7 Front Assembly Parts 6 7 Main Frame Assembly Parts FDD Assembly 3 23 Front Assembly Parts 5 8 oe 1 Rear Assembly Parts 7 8 Fuse Selection Contents 14 Main Frame Assembly Parts A50 DC DC Converter Assembly 17 23 10 11 10 12 10 13 10 14 10 15 10 16 10 17 10 18 10 19 10 20 10 21 10 22 10 23 10 24 10 25 10 26 10 27 10 28 10 29 10 30 10 31 10 32 10 33 10 34 10 35 10 36 10 37 10 38 10 39 10 40 10 41 10 42 10 43 10 44 10 45 10 46 10 47 10 48 10 49 10 50 11 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 A 7 A 8 A 9 A 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 Front Assembly Parts 3 8 Front Assembly Parts 4 8 Top View Major Assemblies Main Frame Assembly Parts A5 and AT Assemblies 18 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts YTO Assembiy 20 23 Fuse Selection 11 12 14 15 16 1 Contents 15 General Information
56. 3 0 dB 3 0 dB 0 264 dB 80 Hz 3 0 dB 3 0 dB 0 264 dB 100 Hz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 264 dB 200 Hz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 264 dB 500 Hz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 264 dB 1 kHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 264 dB 2 kHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 264 dB 5 kHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 264 dB 10 kHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 264 dB 20 kHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 264 dB 50 kHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 264 dB 100 kHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 264 dB 200 kHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 264 dB 500 kHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 264 dB 1 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 077 dB 2 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 077 dB 5 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 077 dB 8 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 081 dB 10 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 081 dB 20 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 081 dB 4 18 Performance Test Record Frequency Minimum Limit Test Result Test Limit Measurement Uncertainty 100 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 093 dB 125 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 093 dB 150 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 093 dB 175 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 200 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 225 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 250 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 275 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 300 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 325 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 350 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 375 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 400 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 425 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 450 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 475 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 500 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB Input A Level Accuracy Minimum Limit Test Result Maximum Limit Measurement U
57. 5 31 5 32 6 2 1 2 1 3 7 4 1 6 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 12 1 13 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 7 8 9 9 5 10 4 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 10 10 10 11 10 12 10 13 10 14 10 15 10 16 10 17 10 18 10 19 10 20 10 21 10 22 10 23 10 24 10 25 10 26 10 27 10 28 10 29 10 30 Contents 11 10 27 10 28 10 29 10 30 10 31 10 32 10 33 10 34 10 35 10 36 10 37 10 35 10 39 10 40 10 41 10 42 10 43 10 44 10 45 10 46 1 2 3 4 A 5 A 6 8 9 10 12 A 13 B 1 Main Frame Assembly Parts FDD Assembly 4 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts 5 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts 6 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts A20 Motherboard Assembly 1 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts 8 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts 9 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts A1 CPU Board Assembly 10 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts 11 23 SEEN Main Frame Assembly Parts 12 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts 9 Input Multiplexer Assembly 13 28 Main Frame Assembly Parts 14 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts 15 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts Pre regulator Assembly 16 23 Frame Assembly Parts A5 and A7 Assemblies 18 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts 2 DC Bias Assembly 19 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts YTO Assembly 20 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts YTO Assembly 21 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts YTO Assembly 22 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts 23 23 ZE Front Assembly Parts 3 7 Fro
58. 500 MHz 500 MHz 100 Hz i On the 4395A press Center 5 0 to set the center frequency to the first setting 50 MHz in Table 2 22 j Perform the following steps to measure the frequency response i Press Trigger SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep li Press Search SEARCH PEAK to place the marker at the peak of the carrier iii Record the 4395A marker reading and power meter reading in the 4395A Reading 1 and Power Meter Reading 1 columns of the calculation sheet for the 50 MHz reference k Change the signal generator frequency the 4395A center frequency and RBW in accordance with Table 2 22 Then repeat step 1 j for each setting Record the 4395A marker reading and power meter reading in the 4395A Reading 1 and Power Meter Reading 1 columns of the calculation sheet for frequencies gt 1 MHz 1 Reverse the power splitter output connections as shown in Figure 2 25 Performance Tests 2 67 Signal Generator TO FREQ REF 0000 Io OUTPUT 0000 O BNC m BNC m Cable 122 Power Meter 0000 0000 0000 00000000 00 0000 e 00 O w N m N m Adapter Power Sensor N m N m Cable Power Splitter
59. 500 kHz 1 MHz 2 MHz 5 MHz 8 MHz 10 MHz 20 50 100 MHz 125 MHz 175 MHz 200 MHz 225 MHz 275 MHz 300 MHz 325 MHz 375 MHz 400 MHz 425 MHz 415 MHz 500 MHz 3 8 Calculation Sheet 4395A Reading a dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm Meter Reading b dBm Test Result a b dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB Input Frequency 100 Hz 200 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 2 kHz 5 kHz 10 kHz 20 kHz 50 kHz 100 kHz 200 kHz 500 kHz 1 MHz 2 MHz 5 MHz 8 MHz 10 MHz 20 MHz 50 MHz 100 MHz 125 MHz 175 MHz 200 MHz 225 MHz 275 MHz 300 MHz 325 MHz 375 MHz 400 MHz 425 MHz 415 MHz 500 MHz 4395A Reading a dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm Meter Reading Test Result
60. ATTEN 0 x1 j Set the step attenuator to 10 dB k Press Cal CALIBRATE MENU RESPONSE THRU to perform the response THRU calibration Wait for the completion of the sweep Then press DONE RESPONSE I Set the step attenuator to the first setting 20d B in the second colum of Table 2 17 Table 2 17 B R Dynamic Accuracy Test Settings 2 4395A Step Attenuator Input Level 20 dB 20 dB 30 dB 30 dB 40 dB 40 dB 50 dB 50 dB 60 dB 60 dB 70 dB 10 dB 80 dB 80 dB 90 dB 90 dB 100 dB 100 dB m Perform the following steps to measure the dynamic accuracy i Press Trigger NUMBER OF GROUPS 5 x1 to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep ii Press Marker to move the channel 1 marker to 50 1 MHz iii Record the channel 1 marker reading in the calculation sheet for the magnitude ratio dynamic accuracy Use the 4395A reading column corresponding to the input level in the first column of Table 2 17 iv Press to move the channel 2 marker to MHz v Record the channel 2 marker reading directly in the performance test record Use the test result column of the phase measurement corresponding to the input level in the first column of Table 2 17 n Change the step attenuator setting in accordance with the second column of Table 2 17 and perform step 4 m for each setting 2 44 Performance Tests 12 MAGNITUDE RATIO PHASE FREQUENCY RESPONSE TEST NA Descr
61. Amplitude 14 dBm 2 Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2 27 Note Connect the signal generator s 10 MHz frequency reference output to the 4395A EXT REF Input on the rear panel as shown Figure 2 27 With this 3 configuration both the signal generator and the 4395A are phase locked to the same reference frequency to obtain a stable measurement Performance Tests 2 71 BNC m BNC m Cable 122 FREQ REF OUTPUT Signal Generator 00000000 N m BNC f Adapter Power Splitter BNC m BNC m Cable 61 cm N m BNC f Adapter L Power Sensor Power Meter H BNC f BNC f SOMHz Low Pass Adapter Filter Direct Connection No Cable 502024 Figure 2 27 Second Harmonics Distortion Test Setup 3 Press Meas ANALYZER TYPE SPECTRUM ANALYZER Preset to initialize the 4395A Then set the controls as follows Control Settings Key Strokes Input Port R Meas R Center Frequency 50 1 MHz Center 5 0 C 1 Frequency Span 17 935 kHz span 1 9 6 3 6 RBW 30 Hz
62. CLASS maximum of seven standards can be defined for any class 200 Execution error This is the generic syntax error that the analyzer cannot detect more specific errors This code indicates only that an execution error as defined in IEEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 5 has occurred Messages 5 Error Messages in Alphabetical Order 123 Exponent too large The magnitude of the exponent was larger than 32000 see IEEE 488 2 7 7 2 4 1 257 File name error Indicates that a legal program command or query could not be executed because the file name on the device media was in error For example an attempt was made to copy to a duplicate file name The definition of what constitutes a file name error is device specific 256 File name not found A legal program command could not be executed because the file name on the device media was not found for example an attempt was made to read or copy a nonexistent file 143 FLOATING POINT ERROR OCCURED Indicate that a floating point error occured in the analyzer Data processing may not be correct This error message is used when an internal application was executed for illegal data sent from an external device or when an internal software bug was detected Contact your nearest Agilent Technologies office 83 FORMAT NOT VALID FOR MEASUREMENT The conversion function except the 1 5 and the multiple phase modes is not valid for the Smith admittance and SWR formats 131 FREQUENCY SWEEP ONL
63. Controls Settings Reference Level 20 dBm b On the 4395A press Center 1 0 to set the center frequency to the first center frequency listed in the first column of Table 2 7 Table 2 7 lists test frequencies Table 2 7 Non Harmonics Test Settings 4395A Spectrum Analyzer Center Frequency Non Harmonics Spurious Frequency RBW Frequency Span 10 Hz 830 00001 MHz 10 Hz 10 Hz 230 MHz 600 MHz 1 kHz 30 Hz 330 MHz 500 MHz 1 kHz 30 Hz 430 MHz 400 MHz 1 kHz 30 Hz 500 MHz 330 MHz 1 kHz 30 Hz c On the spectrum analyzer perform the following steps to measure the non harmonic spurious level of the first test frequency 10 Hz d Perform the following steps to test non harmonics spurious of 4395A 1 ii iii iv vl viii Set the 8566A B center frequency to the same value as the 4395A center frequency Set the 8566A B frequency span and RBW in accordance with Table 2 7 Press to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep Press PEAK sEARCH A to move the marker to the peak of the fundamental signal and to place the delta maker reference at the peak Set the 8566A B center frequency to the frequency listed in the second column of Table 2 7 Press to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep Press PEAK sEARCH to move the marker to the peak of the non harmonic spurious Record the delta marker reading in the calculation sheet Delta Marke
64. DIAG H 51 DSK DR FAULT ISOL N H 52 24 I O PORT H 53 A SRC TOR 11 1 TT 11 11 54 SRC TO A 11 1 TT 11 11 55 11 1 TT 11 11 56 SRC 11 1 TT 11 11 57 BR RATIO 11 1 TT 11 11 58 SA LEVEL 1 11 11 11 59 SA PHASE NOISE tt 1 1 1 tt Most suspicious assembly and should be replaced T Suspicious assembly and should be checked 6 8 Troubleshooting Performance Tests Failure Troubleshooting Perform the following procedure sequentially when any of performance tests fail Perform Adjustments and Correction Constants Table 6 3 gives the recommended adjustments and correction constants when a performance test fails If a performance test fails you should perform the corresponding adjustments or correction constants function as shown in Table 6 3 If the tests still fail refer to Table 6 4 and replace the assembly Note that this table lists some typical cases In a few cases other assembly may actually be faulty Table 6 3 Troubleshooting Information for Performance Test Failure 1 Test Failed Test Adjustment Test Number No 1 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 18 14 15 1 Frequency Accuracy Test 2 Source Level Accuracy Flatness Test 3 on sweep Linearity Test 4 Power Sweep Linearity Test 5 Harmonics Non harmonic Test 6 DC Bias Test v T Receiver Noise
65. Front Assembly Parts 3 8 Table 10 12 Front Assembly Parts 3 8 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 04852 04014 3 1 Cover 28480 04352 04014 1 4970 25008 9 1 Sponge 28480 E4970 25003 2 04352 25002 3 1 Insulator 28480 04352 25002 3 0950 3749 5 1 A54 Inverter Board 28480 0950 3749 4 0515 0977 3 2 SCR MACH M2X0 4 28480 0515 0977 5 04852 61688 2 1 Wire Assy 28480 04352 61633 6 0400 0010 2 1 Gromet 28480 0400 0010 10 14 Replaceable Parts CDS11006 Front Assembly Parts 4 8 11 10 igure F Front Assembly Parts 4 8 13 Table 10 b Z 15 Bo u BAS ZIS DIN A m a LD a 2 24 lt O gt e Sl 15 2820 X aD Ta Zl m Of N s lt Replaceable Parts 10 15 CDS11047 Figure 10 12 Front Assembly Parts 5 8 Table 10 14 Front Assembly Parts 5 8 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 4970 66540 5 1 LCD MINI BD 28480 E4970 66540 2 0515 1550 0 4 SCR M3 L 8 28480 0515 1550 10 16 Replaceable Parts Polarity Line must be CDS11048 Figure 10 13 Front Assembly Parts 6 8 Ta
66. Hz 500 kHz 100 Hz iii Press Trigger SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep iv Record the trace mean value and the multimeter reading in the calculation sheet 4395A Reading column and Meter Reading column respectively The trace mean value is displayed as a marker statistic mean in the upper right hand corner of the display v Change the 4395A center frequency and IF Bandwidth in accordance with Table 2 12 and repeat steps 1 and 1 e iv for each center frequency f Remove the power splitter from the R input and connect it directly to the input Press Meas to set the 4395A to the A input a R Repeat step 1 to test the absolute amplitude accuracy at the 4395A input i Remove the power splitter from the input and connect it directly to the B input j Press B to set the 4395A to the B input Repeat step 1 to test the absolute amplitude accuracy at the B input Calculate the test results using the equation given in the calculation sheet Record the test results in the performance test record 2 For testing high frequencies a Connect the power sensor to the power meter Calibrate the power meter for the power sensor b Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2 13 Performance Tests 2 33 Power Meter 00000000
67. IF 8 dB 16 dB Gain Adjustment IF Gain Error CC Temprature Adjustment Receiver Flatness Adjustment Receiver Attnuator Adjustment IF BPF Flatness Adjustment DC Bias Adjustment 1 See the Digital Control Troubleshooting chapter 2 See the Troubleshooting chapter Post Repair Procedures 11 1 Table 11 1 Post Repair Procedures continued Replaced Adjustments Verification Assembly or Part Correction Constants A2 DC Bias DC Bias Adjustment INSPECT THE POWER ON SEQUENCE 1 DC Bias Test Tracking Source Local DAC Adjustment INSPECT THE POWER ON SEQUENCE 1 Source Flatness Adjustment Frequency Accuracy Source Level Flatness Non sweep Linearity Power Sweep Linearity Harmonics Non harmonic Input Crosstalk Input Impedance A5 Local Synthesizer Local DAC Adjustment Source Power Adjustment Source Flatness Adjustment Input Local Null Adjustment Receiver Gain Adjustment IF 8 dB 16 dB Gain Adjustment Temprature Adjustment Receiver Flatness Adjustment Receiver Attnuator Adjustment IF BPF Flatness Adjustment INSPECT THE POWER ON SEQUENCE 1 Frequency Accuracy Source Level Flatness Non sweep Linearity Power Sweep Linearity Harmonics Non harmonic Receiver Noise Level Input Crosstalk Absolute Amplitude Accuracy Magnitude Ratio Phase Dynamic Accuracy Magnitude Ratio Phase Frequency Response Displayed Average Noise Level Amplitude Fidelity Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty Noise Sid
68. INTRODUCTION This Service Manual is a guide to servicing the 4395A Network Spectrum Impedance Analyzer This manual provides information about performance test adjustment troubleshooting and repairing the analyzer ORGANIZATION OF SERVICE MANUAL This manual consists of major chapters listed below The chapters are divided by tabs This section describes the names of the tabs and the content of each chapter m Perfomance Test provides the procedures required for performance test of the analyzer m Calculation Sheet provides a calculation sheet for those perfomance tests that require additional calculation to determine the final test results m Performance Test Record provides a performance test record The record sheets provides for all test items m Adjustments provides procedures for adjusting the analyzer after repair or replacement of an assembly Some of the adjustments updates correction constants stored into the Flash ROM on the Al CPU board The correction constants is updated by using the adjustment program PN 04395 18004 Note The next four four chapters are the core troubleshooting chapters w Troubleshooting The troubleshooting strategy is to systematically verify portions of the analyzer and thus narrow down the cause of a problem to the defective assembly This chapter is the first of a series of troubleshooting procedures It checks the operation of the analyzer independent of system peripherals and s
69. Input on the rear panel as shown in Figure 2 28 With this 3 configuration both the signal generator and the 4395A are phase locked to the same reference frequency to obtain a stable measurement Performance Tests 2 73 a BNC BNC m BNC m Cable 122 cm 00000000 N m N m Cable N m N m Adapter P Splitt Power Sensor N m N m Cable ower Splitter N m N m Cable APC 7 N f Adapter Power Meter 508 Termination T R Test Set Direct Connection No Cable CCS02038 Figure 2 28 Third Order Intermodulation Distortion Test Setup 2 Initialize both signal generators Then set their controls as follows Controls Settings Modulation OFF Amplitude 10 dBm RF Signal OFF 3 Press Meas ANALYZER TYPE SPECTRUM ANALYZER Preset to initialize the 4395A Then set the controls as follows Control Settings Key Strokes Input R Meas R Center Frequency 100 25 MHz Center 1 0 0 5 Frequency Span 400 kHz Span 4 0 0 RBW 1 kHz Bw Avg RES BW 1 Video BW 1 kHz Bw Avg VIDEO BW 1 Reference Level 10 dBm S
70. Level Frequency IFBW 10 Hz 100 lt lt 100 kHz 85 dBm 100 kHz lt freq lt 115 11 100 dBm 1 f is measurement frequency MHz Test Equipment 500 Termination three required 909 Opt 012 or part of 85032B Procedure 1 Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2 9 00000000 500 Termination 502006 Figure 2 9 Receiver Noise Level Test Setup Performance Tests 2 21 Control Settings Input Port R Format LINEAR Scale Division 5 uU Input Attenuator R 10 dB Input Port Format LINEAR Scale Division 5 uU Input Attenuator A 10 dB Input Port B Format LINEAR Scale Division 5 uU Input Attenuator B 10 dB Source Power 50 dBm Frequency Span 0 Hz IF BW 10 Hz Number of Points 51 Statistics ON 2 Press Meas ANALYZER TYPE NETWORK ANALYZER Preset to initialize the 4395A Then set the controls as follows Key Strokes Meas R Format LIN MAG Scale Ref SCALE DIV 5 Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN 1 0 1 Meas A Format LIN MAG Scale Ref SCALE DIV 5 Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN A 1 1 Meas Format LIN MAG Scale Ref SCALE DIV 5 Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN 1 9 x1 Gourc POWER C Span ZERO SPAN O Sweep NUMBER o
71. Level Test 8 Crosstalk Test 9 nput Impedance Test 10 Absolute Amplitude Accuracy Test 11 agnitude Ratio Phase Dynamic Accuracy Test 12 agnitude Ratio Phase Frequency Response Test 13 Displayed Average Noise Level Test 14 Amplitude Fidelity Test 15 nput Attenuator Switching Uncertainty Test 16 oise Sidebands Test 17 Amplitude Accuracy Frequency Response Test 18 Second Harmonic Distortion Test 19 Third Order Intermodulation Distortion Test 20 Other Spurious Test 21 Residual Response Test Troubleshooting 6 9 Table 6 4 Troubleshooting Information for Performance Test Failure 2 Test Failed Test Probable Faulty Assembly No Al A20 A30 A32 A33 A2 AT AS A9 1 Frequency Accuracy Test 11 2 Source Level Accuracy Flatness 11 Test 3 on sweep Linearity Test 11 4 Power Sweep Linearity Test 11 5 Harmonics Non harmonic Test tt 6 DC Bias Test ttt T Receiver Noise Level Test TT TT 8 nput Crosstalk Test 111 9 nput Impedance Test 111 10 Absolute Amplitude Accuracy 111 111 111 Test 11 agn
72. MHz 30 dBm 6 897 MHz 6 897 MHz 17 94 kHz 30 Hz 30 6 900 MHz 30 dBm 6 897 MHz 6 897 MHz 17 94 kHz 30 Hz 30 6 903 MHz 30 dBm 256 897 MHz 256 897 MHz 17 94 kHz 30 Hz 30 256 900 MHz 30 dBm 256 897 MHz 256 897 MHz 17 94 kHz 30 Hz 30 Hz 256 903 MHz 30 dBm 494 397 MHz 494 397 MHz 17 94 kHz 30 Hz 30 Hz 494 400 MHz 30 dBm 494 397 MHz 494 397 MHz 17 94 kHz 30 Hz 30 Hz 494 403 MHz 30 dBm Performance Tests 2 77 5 the 4395 perform the following steps to measure the spurious level In each step the carrier level is measured first Then the spurious level is measured a Set the controls as follows to measure the carries level Control Settings Key Strokes Center Frequency 276 8666667 Center 2 7 6 C 8 6 6 5 6 6 Frequency Span 1 MHz Span 1 RBW 3 kHz Bw Avg RES BW 3 The center frequency is set to the frequency of the signal generator b Press Trigger SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep C Press Search Marker AMODE MENU FIXED AMKR to place the delta marker reference at the peak of the carrier d Set the following controls to the settings listed in Table 2 24 from the second to the fifth columns Control Settings Key Strokes Center Frequency 300 MHz Center 3 0 0 Frequency Span 17 95 kHz span 1 z C
73. MHz 125 MHz 150 MHz 175 MHz 200 MHz 225 MHz 250 MHz 275 MHz 300 MHz 325 MHz 350 MHz 315 MHz 400 MHz 425 MHz 450 MHz 415 MHz 500 MHz 4395A Power Meter 4395A Power Meter Reading 1 Reading 1 Reading 2 Reading 2 at b1 a2 2 dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm Test Result al b1 a2 b2 2 dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB Calculation Sheet ref 3 19 At Frequencies lt 1 MHz Frequency 1 Input Reference at 50 MHz 10 Hz 15 Hz 25 Hz 40 Hz 80 Hz 100 Hz 200 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 2 kHz 5 kHz 10 kHz 20 kHz 50 kHz 100 kHz 200 kHz 500 kHz 4395A Reading c Test Result c 20 dBm ref dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB dBm dB function gen
74. NOT ROTATING D 1 Check the Line Voltage Selector Switch Setting and Fuse 2 Check the A50 SHUTDOWN LED D FIND OUT WHY THE A50 SHUTDOWN LED IS OFF 1 Disconnect the Cable from the A1J10 2 Remove Assemblies 3 Disconnect the Cable from the A9J2 FIND OUT WHY THE Al 5 VD LED IS NOT ON STEADILY 1 Check the A40 Pre Regulator 2 Check the A50 DC DC Converter 3 Disconnect Cables on the A1 CPU 5 27 5 27 5 29 5 29 5 29 5 30 5 30 5 30 5 31 5 31 5 31 6 1 6 1 6 3 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 8 6 9 6 9 7 1 1 3 1 3 1 3 7 4 7 4 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 9 7 9 7 9 7 10 Contents 7 4 Remove Assemblies 7 11 5 Remove Assemblies SE 1 11 TROUBLESHOOT THE FAN AND THE A50 DC DC CONVERTER e 1 12 1 Troubleshoot the Fan MM 1 12 2 Troubleshoot the A50 DC DC Converter MM 1 13 8 Digital Control Troubleshooting INTRODUCTION aaa oss 8 1 CPU Replacement MV 8 3 FIRMWARE INSTALLATION MM 8 4 Ordering the Firmware Diskette 8 4 Installing the Firmware ll 8 4 START HERE MMC 8 6 1 Check the Power On Sequence MM 8 6 Check the ch 1 and 2 Operations FEP 8 6 Check the Al Eight LEDs M S 8 6 2 Check Error Messages MM LZ 8 7 3 Check the A1 DRAM and Flash Memory ML 8 8 4 Check the Al Volatile Memory 8 9 5 Check the A30 Front Keyboar
75. Number D Code Number 1 4970 00103 8 1 DECK 28480 E4970 00103 2 0515 0914 8 31 SCR MACH M3X0 5 28480 0515 0914 3 0515 1550 0 41 SCR M3 L 8 28480 0515 1550 Replaceable Parts 10 35 506046 Figure 10 32 Main Frame Assembly Parts 9 23 Table 10 34 Main Frame Assembly Parts 9 23 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 4970 64903 0 1 ANGLE ASSY 28480 E4970 64903 2 0515 1011 8 4 SCR FL M4L6 28480 0515 1011 3 1400 1334 6 4 CLAMP CABLE 28480 1400 1334 10 36 Replaceable Parts 506047 Figure 10 33 Main Frame Assembly Parts A1 CPU Board Assembly 10 23 Table 10 35 Main Frame Assembly Parts A1 CPU Board Assembly 10 23 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 E4970 66501 8 1 CPU BOARD 28480 E4970 66501 2 0515 1550 0 41 5 M3 L 8 28480 0515 1550 3 1818 6574 1 2 FLASH ROM 28480 1818 6574 Replaceable Parts 10 37 0 506048 Figure 10 34 Main Frame Assembly Parts 11 23 Table 10 36 Main Frame Assembly Parts 11 23 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 04896 61668 0 3 CA ASSY FLAT 40 28480 04396 61663 2 04396 61661 8 2 CA ASSY FLAT 100 28480 04396 61661 3 04396 61707 3 1 CABLE ASSY 28480 043
76. Reference Adjustment Oven Reference Adjustment Option 1D5 Local DAC Adjustment Source Power Adjustment lt lt lt Source Flatness Adjustment Input DC Offset Adjustment Input Local Null Adjustment IF 24 dB Gain Phase Adjustment Receiver Gain Adjustment IF 8 dB 16 dB Gain Adjustment Temprature Adjustment Receiver Flatness Adjustment Receiver Attnuator Adjustment IF BPF Flatness Adjustment DC Bias Adjustment Option 010 LALALA lt Note The adjustments without the check in the Table 5 2 does not require the HP VEE Adjustment Program to perform the adjustment You should perform 3 them manually or use the intenal adjustment tests Performing Adjustments The adjustments are empirically derived data that is stored in memory and then recalled to refine the 4395A s measurement and to define its operation Setting Up the System Performing adjustments requires the system described in this section The Hardware Setup is shown in Figure 5 1 5 4 Adjustments PERSONAL COMPUTER Signal Generator GPIB Cables Multimeter 0000 0000 0000 0000 Frequency Counter 00 00
77. SYSTEM SERVICE TESTS Pressing INTERNAL TESTS jumps to the first test internal test test 0 ALL INT b Select the test using the RPG knob keys or ENTRY keys C Press EXECUTE TEST to execute the specifyed test d Wait until the test result PASS or FAIL is displayed Note Internal test 1 2 3 7 17 18 38 and 39 are not executed in the power on selftest You should perform these tests by specifying test number or by 3 executing all internal tests 6 6 Troubleshooting Table 6 1 Troubleshooting Information for Internal Test Failure Test First Failed Test Probable Faulty Assembly No Al A32 A33 A40 A50 A51 A2 A3 A5 AT A8 A9 1 A1 CPU ttt 2 A1 Volatile Memory 111 3 A51 GSP ttt 4 A2 12 V Supply 111 5 A2 Reference Monitor 111 6 A2 Board ID 1 ttt 7 A3 DAC Output Voltage ttt 8 5 V Supply ttt 9 5 V Supply ttt 10 15 V Supply ttt 11 15 Supply ttt 12 Board ID t ttt 13 A5 15 Supply 14 A5 5 V Supply 15 A5 Power Supply 16 A5 Y TO Control Voltage Reference 17 A5 Control Voltage Start 18 A5 Y TO Control Voltage Span 19 A5 Temprature Monitor 20 A5 25 MHz Clock 1 21 A5 Board ID 1 22 5 VD Supply 23 AT 5 V Supply 24 AT 5 V Supply 25 AT 12 V Supply 26 AT 15 V Supply 2T 25 MHz Local Level 28 AT 25 MHz Freq 1 29 AT Board ID 1 30 A8 ADC Check ttt 31 8 24 V Supply 32 8
78. Settings Key Strokes Center Frequency 50 1 MHz center 5 9 CQ Frequency Span 120 Hz Span 1 2 9 RBW 10 Ga RES Scale Division 5 dB Div Scale Ref SCALE DIV 5 Press Meas to set the 4395A to the R input 7 Press Scale Ref REFERENCE VALUE C 3 0 x1 Scale Ref ATTENUATOR ATTEN R 1 0 1 to set the 4395A controls to the reference setting for the test 8 Perform the following steps to measure the input attenuator switching uncertainly Press Trigger SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep b Press Search Marke AMODE MENU FIXED AMKR to place the delta reference marker on the peak of the carrier c Set the 4395A controls as follows This sets the input attenuator and reference level to the first settings listed in Table 2 20 Control Settings Key Strokes Input Attenuator R 0 dB Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN R 0 Reference Level 40 dBm Scale Ref REFERENCE VALUE 2 4 9 Performance Tests 2 59 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Table 2 20 Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty Test Settings E 4395A Step Attenuator Input Attenuator Reference Level 0 dB 40 dBm 50 dB 20 dB 20 dBm 30 dB 30 dB 10 dBm 20 dB 40 dB 0 dBm 10 dB 50 dB 10 dBm 0 dB d Set the step attenuator to the first setting 50 dB listed in the t
79. THE POWER ON SEQ UENCE External Test 52 24 BIT IJO PORT A40 Pre Regulator DC Bias Adjustment INSPECT THE POWER ON SEQUENCE A50 DC DC Converter None INSPECT THE POWER ON SEQUENCE 51 GSP None INSPECT THE POWER ON SEQUENCE A52 LCD None INSPECT THE POWER ON SEQUENCE A53 FDD None INSPECT THE POWER ON SEQUENCE External Test 51 DSK DR FAULTY ISOLN2 1 See the Troubleshooting chapter 2 See the Digital Control Troubleshooting chapter 11 4 Post Repair Procedures Manual Changes Introduction This appendix contains the information required to adapt this manual to earlier versions or configurations of the analyzer than the current printing date of this manual The information in this manual applies directly to the 4395A Network Spectrum Impedance Analyzer serial number prefix listed on the title page of this manual Manual Changes adapt this manual to your 4395A see Table 1 and Table 2 and make all the manual changes listed opposite your instrument s serial number and firmware version Instruments manufactured after the printing of this manual may be different from those documented in this manual Later instrument versions will be documented in a manual changes supplement that will accompany the manual shipped with that instrument If your instrument s serial number is not listed on the title page of this manual or in Table it may be documented in a yellow MAN
80. Test Sets I meme ehe 85044A 500 Type N Calibration Kit aaa aaa ia 85032B APCT 5 N f adapter 11524A or part of 85032B Type N Cable 61 cm four required 11500B or part of 11851B 1 This calibration kit includes several terminations and adapters This test requires the OPEN f SHORT f LOAD f in the calibration kit 85032B Procedure 1 Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2 11 Don t connect anything to the end of the test port cable Performance Tests 2 27 Network Analyzer 0 00000000 000000 Open f Short f T R Test Set Load f APC 7 N f Adapter Test Port Cable N m N m Cable 502030 Figure 2 11 Impedance Test Setup 2 Press Meas ANALYZER TYPE NETWORK ANALYZER to initialize the 4395A Then set the controls as follows Control Settings Key Strokes Input Attenuator R 10d B Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN R 1 o x1 Input Attenuator A 10d B Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN A 1 9 Input Attenuator B 10dB Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN 1 0 1 3 On the network analyzer perform the following steps to set th
81. The SHUTDOWN LED location on 50 DC DC Converter is shown in Figure 7 2 m If the A50 SHUTDOWN LED is off continue with the FIND OUT WHY THE A50 SHUTDOWN LED IS OFF in this chapter m If the A50 SHUTDOWN LED is on continue with the Check the A1 5 VD LED in this procedure 4395A Top View Rear 50 DC DC Converter Shutdown H 6 Normally On CCS07017 Figure 7 2 50 SHUTDOWN LED Location Power Supply Troubleshooting 7 3 A50 Shutdown LED The A50 SHUTDOWN LED turning off indicates some of A50 power supply is shut down by the A50 shutdown circuitry There are two FAN conditions rotating and not rotating when the SHUTDOWN LED turns off When the fan is rotating the shutdown circuit is probably activated by the over current condition on the power lines in the A50 DC DC Convereter In this condition though the A50 power supplies 24 V 5 VD 18 V 47 8 V 7 8 V and 18 V are shut down the Fan Power 24 V is still supplied to the fan When the fan is not rotating the shutdown circuit is probably activated by the FAN LOCK signal missing Note Once the A50 shutdown circuit is activated the only way to reset the circuit is turnin
82. are invalid or the EEPROM is faulty Rewrite all correction constants into the EEPROM For the detailed procedure See the Adjustments chapter in this manual If the rewriting is not successfully performed replace the EEPROM and then rewrite the all correction constants into the new EEPROM Svc Status Annotation This indicates that the correction constants stored in the EEPROM on the A1 CPU are invalid or the EEPROM is faulty See the instruction of the EEPROM CHECK SUM ERROR message POWER FAILED ON One or some of A power supplies 15 V 8 5 V 5 3 V 5 V 5 V 15 V are displayed in of the message The displayed power supplies are shut down due to the trouble on the A2 post regulator Continue with the Power Supply Troubleshooting chapter Digital Control Troubleshooting 8 7 POWER FAILED ON PostRegHot This indicates A2 power supplies 15 V 8 5 V 5 3 V 5 V 5 V 15 V are shut down due to too hot heat sink on 2 post regulator Cool down the analyzer for about 30 minutes T hen turn the analyzer power on If this message is still displayed replace 2 post regulator PHASE LOCK LOOP UNLOCKED This indicates one or some of PLLs phase lock loops in the oscillators is not working properly These oscillators are checked in the internal test 0 ALL INT Continue with the next Check the Power On Selftest in where the ALL INT test is executed 3 Check the A1 DRAM and Flash Memory The A1 DRAM and flash mem
83. attached to a program mnemonic makes the header invalid 120 Numeric data error This error as well as errors 121 through 129 are generated when parsing data element that appears to be numeric including the nondecimal numeric types This particular error message is used if the analyzer cannot detect a more specific error 2121 Invalid character in number An invalid character for the data type being parsed was encountered For example an alpha character in a decimal numeric or a 9 in octal data 123 Exponent too large The magnitude of the exponent was larger than 32000 see IEEE 488 2 7 7 2 4 1 124 Too many digits The mantissa of a decimal numeric data element contains more than 255 digits excluding leading zeros see IEEE 488 2 7 7 2 4 1 128 Numeric data not allowed A legal numeric data element was received but the analyzer does not accept it in this position for a header Messages 24 Error Messages in Numerical Order 130 Suffix error This error as well as errors 131 through 139 are generated when parsing a suffix This particular error message is used if the analyzer cannot detect a more specific error 131 Invalid suffix The suffix does not follow the syntax described in IEEE 488 2 7 7 3 2 or the suffix is inappropriate for the analyzer 134 Suffix too long The suffix contained more than 12 characters see IEEE 488 2 7 7 3 4 138 Suffix not allowed
84. dB 30 dB 0 07 dB 0 07 dB 0 012 dB 40 dB 0 15 dB 0 15 dB 0 014 dB 50 dB 0 35 dB 0 35 dB 0 015 dB 60 dB 0 8 dB 0 8 dB 0 024 dB 70 dB 1 8 dB 1 8 dB 0 037 dB Input B dB from Minimum Limit Test Result Maximum Limit Measurement Reference Input Level Uncertainty 10 dB 0 05 dB 0 05 dB 0 011 dB 10 dB 0 05 dB 0 05 dB 0 011 dB 20 dB 0 05 dB 0 05 dB 0 012 dB 30 dB 0 07 dB 0 07 dB 0 012 dB 40 dB 0 15 dB 0 15 dB 0 014 dB 50 dB 0 35 dB 0 35 dB 0 015 dB 60 dB 0 8 dB 0 8 dB 0 024 dB 70 dB 1 8 dB 1 8 dB 0 037 dB Performance Test Record 4 15 15 INPUT ATTENUATOR SWITCHING UNCERTAINTY TEST Input R Input Minimum Limit Test Result Maximum Limit Measurement Attenuation Uncertainty 0 dB 1 dB 1 0 017 dB 20 dB 1 dB 1 dB 0 016 dB 30 dB 1 dB 1 dB 0 016 dB 40 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 016 dB 50 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 024 dB Input A Input Minimum Limit Test Result Maximum Limit Measurement Attenuation Uncertainty 0 dB 1 dB 1 dB 0 017 dB 20 dB 1 dB 1 dB 0 016 dB 30 dB 1 dB 1 dB 0 016 dB 40 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 016 dB 50 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 024 dB Input B Input Minimum Limit Test Result Maximum Limit Measurement Attenuation Uncertainty 0 dB 1 dB 1 dB 0 017 dB 20 dB 1 dB 1 dB 0 016 dB 30 dB 1 dB 1 dB 0 016 dB 40 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 016 dB 50 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 024 dB 4 16 Performance Test Rec
85. dB 30 dBm 10 dB 40 dBm 10 dB 50 dBm 10 dB Performance Tests 2 9 9 Change the source power and the step attenuator setting in accordance with Table 2 3 Record the power meter reading in the calculation sheet Use Power Meter Reading column of the calculation sheet for the non sweep power linearity test 10 Repeat step 9 for each setting 11 Calculate the test results using the equations given in the calculation sheet Record the test results in the performance test record 2 10 Performance Tests 4 POWER SWEEP LINEARITY TEST NA Description This test sets the 4395A to the power sweep mode and then makes a power sweep from 50 dBm to 30 dBm and 5 dBm to 15 dBm in 5 dB steps Using a power meter and a high sensitivity power sensor the actual power of the 4395A RF OUT signal at each sweep point is measured Then the power sweep linearity for a sweep span lt 20 dB is calculated The power linearity is specified as values relative to the stop power This test uses a step attenuator to maintain the power sensor input level lt 35 dBm This reduces the measurement uncertainty caused by the power sensor s linearity error The actual power of the RF OUT signal is calculated by adding the attenuation used and the power meter reading Specification Sweep range e m hern 20 dB Sweep linearity 23 5 C 50 MHz relative to stop power
86. dBm Hz Calculation Sheet 3 13 14 AMPLITUDE FIDELITY Step Attenuator Calibration Value at 50 MHz Amplitude Fidelity Input R Attenuation 10 dB 1 20 dB 2 30 dB a3 40 dB a4 50 dB ab 60 dB a6 TU dB 80 dB a8 Calibration Value dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB 1 Incremental attenuation referenced to dB setting dB from Reference Input Level Input A 10 dB 20 dB 30 dB 40 dB 50 dB 60 dB 70 dB dB from Reference Input Level 3 14 Calculation Sheet 10 dB 20 dB 30 dB 40 dB 50 dB 60 dB 70 dB 4395A Reading b dB dB dB dB dB dB dB 4395A Reading b dB dB dB dB dB dB dB Test Result b a2 al b a3 al b a4 al b a5 al b a6 al b a7 al b a8 al Test Result b a2 al b a3 al b a4 al b a5 al b a6 al b a7 al b a8 al Input B dB from 4395A Reading Reference Input Level b 10 dB 20 30 40 50 60 dB 70 dB Input dB from 4395A Reading Reference Input Level b 10 dB dB Input A dB from 4395A Reading Reference Input Level b 10 dB dB Input B dB from 4395A Reading Reference Input Level b 10 dB dB Test Result b a2 al b a3 al b a4 al b a5 al b a6 al b a7 al b a8 al Test Result b al a2 Test Result b al a2 Test Result b al a2 Calculati
87. example an option was not installed 250 Mass storage error Indicates that a mass storage error occurred This error message is used when the analyzer cannot detect the more specific errors described for errors 257 256 File name not found A legal program command could not be executed because the file name on the device media was not found for example an attempt was made to read or copy a nonexistent file 257 File name error Indicates that a legal program command or query could not be executed because the file name on the device media was in error For example an attempt was made to copy to a duplicate file name The definition of what constitutes a file name error is device specific Messages 27 Error Messages in Numerical Order 280 Program error Indicates that a downloaded program related execution error occurred This error message is used when the analyzer cannot detect the more specific errors described for errors 281 through 289 281 Cannot create program Indicates that an attempt to create a program was unsuccessful reason for the failure might include not enough memory 282 Illegal program name The name used to reference a program was invalid For example redefining an existing program deleting nonexistent program or in general referencing a nonexistent program 283 Illegal variable name attempt was made to reference a nonexistent variable in a program 28
88. in Figure 8 5 at the end of the power on sequence Perform the following procedure to check the Al eight LEDs a Turn the analyzer turn off b Remove the bottom cover of the analyzer c Turn the analyzer power on d Look at the eight LEDs Some of the LEDs light during the power on sequence At the end of the power on sequence the LEDs should stay in the pattern shown in Figure 8 5 If the LEDs stay in the other pattern the A1 CPU is probably faulty Replace the A1 CPU 8 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting O 0N OFF OR HOE HOR HORO Normal Condition He 4395A Bottom View CCS08014 Figure 8 5 A1 Eight LEDs Pattern 2 Check Error Messages Turn the analyzer power on Check no error message appears on the LCD m If no error message is displayed continue with the Check A1 DRAM and Flash Memory in this START HERE m If one of error messages listed below is displayed follow the instruction described below For the other message see the Error Messages in Messages Error Messages Instruction POWER ON TEST FAILED This indicates the power on selftest failed Continue with the next Check Power On Selftest in the chapter 6 EEPROM CHECK SUM ERROR This indicates that the correction constants stored in the EEPROM on the A1 CPU
89. in Figure 2 3 Multimeter B anana 00000000 509 Feedthrough N m BNC f Adapter BNC m BNC m Cable 61 cm 502003 Figure 2 3 Source Level Flatness Test Setup 2 6 Performance Tests Initialize the multimeter Then set the controls as follows Controls Settings Measurement Function AC Volts Mode Display Reading Value dBm Reading Value Measurement Method Syncronous Sampling Conversion NPLC 100 Press Center 1 o to change the 4395A center frequency to the first flatness test frequency 10 Hz listed in Table 2 2 Table 2 2 lists flatness test points for low frequencies Table 2 2 Source Level Flatness Test Settings 2 4395A Center Frequency 10 Hz 50 Hz 500 Hz 2 kHz 12 kHz 60 kHz 160 kHz 500 kHz Wait for the multimeter reading to settle record the reading in the calculation sheet Power Meter Reading column Change the 4395A center frequency in accordance with Table 2 2 and repeat step 6 d for each frequency Calculate test results using the equation given in the calculation sheet Record the test results in the performance test record Performance Tests 2 7 3 NON SWEEP POWER LINEARITY TEST Description This test uses a power meter and a high se
90. in accordance with Table 2 18 Then repeat steps 4 b and 4 for each setting 5 Press Meas to set the 4395A to the input Performance Tests 2 51 6 Repeat step 4 to test the displayed average noise level at the 4395A A input T Press Meas to set the 4395A to the B input 8 Repeat step 4 to test the displayed average noise level at the 4395A B input 9 Convert the unit of the test results from Watt to dBm using the equation given in the calculation sheet Record the test results dBm in the performance test record 2 52 Performance Tests 14 AMPLITUDE FIDELITY TEST SA Description This test checks the 4395A amplitude fidelity at RBW of 10 kHz A 50 1 MHz CW signal is applied to the 4395A R input through a step attenuator The signal amplitude is varied by inserting known attenuation values Each signal amplitude dB is measured to a reference value at the attenuator setting of 10 dB Then the measured values are compared with to the inserted attenuation s calibrated values The amplitude fidelity performance at RBWs lt 3 kHz are not tested in this test The error sources at RBW lt 3 kHz are exactly same as those of the magnitude ratio dynamic accuracy in the 4395A network analyzer mode Because the dynamic accuracy is tested in the Magnitude Ratio Phase Dynamic Accuracy Test the fidelity test at the RBW 3 kHz is omitted The amplitude fidelity performance at low signal levels are not tested in
91. level of the first test frequency 10 kHz second and third Set the 8566A B center frequency to the same value as the 4395A center frequency ii iii iv and to place the delta maker reference at the peak second column of Table 2 6 vi vil viii column 2 16 Performance Tests Set the 8566A B frequency span and RBW in accordance with Table 2 6 Press SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep Press PEAK SEARCH A to move the marker to the peak of the fundamental signal Set the 8566 B center frequency to the second harmonics frequency listed in the Press SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep Press PEAK SEARCH to move the marker to the peak of the second harmonic Record the delta marker reading in the calculation sheet Delta Marker Reading ix Set the 8566 center frequency to the third harmonics frequency listed in the third column of Table 2 6 Press to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep Press to move the marker to the peak of the third harmonic i Record the delta marker reading in the calculation sheet Delta Marker Reading column c Change the measurement setting in accordance with Table 2 6 and repeat step 5 b for each frequency d Calculate test results using the equation given in the calculation sheet 6 Non Harmonic Spurious Test a On the spectrum analyzer set the controls as follows
92. maintenance personnel Do not replace components with the power cable connected Under certain conditions dangerous voltages may exist even with the power cable removed avoid injuries always disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them DO NOT Service Or Adjust Alone Do not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present NOT Substitute Parts Or Modify Instrument Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards do not install substitute parts or perform unauthorized modifications to the instrument Return the instrument to a Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained Dangerous Procedure Warnings Warnings such as the example below precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this manual Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed Warning Dangerous voltages capable of causing death are present in this instrument Use extreme caution when handling testing and adjusting this instrument Safety Symbols General definitions of safety symbols used on equipment or in manuals are listed below Instruction manual symbol the product is marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instruction manual Alternating current MN Direct current On Supply Off Supply In position of push
93. marker is displayed on the screen Turn on the marker before executing the marker commands 12 CALIBRATION CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS The RESUME CAL SEQUENCE softkey is not valid unless a calibration is in progress Start a new calibration 268 NO COMPENSATION CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS No compensation is currently in progress 119 NO DATA TRACE DISPLAYED The SCALE FOR DATA selected when the data trace not displayed 93 NO DATA TRACE The MARKER ON DATA selected when the data trace not displayed 0 No error The error queue is empty Every error in the queue has been read OUTPERRO query or the queue was cleared by power on or the CLS command 100 NO FIXED DELTA MARKER The FIXED AMKR VALUE and FIXED AMKR AUX VALUE softkey requires that fixed delta marker is turned ON 96 MARKER DELTA RANGE NOT SET The MKRA SEARCH RNG softkey requires that delta marker is turned ON 95 MARKER DELTA SPAN NOT SET The MKRA SPAN softkey requires that delta marker mode be turned Messages 9 Error Messages in Alphabetical Order 120 NO MEMORY TRACE DISPLAYED The SCALE FOR MEMORY is selected when the memory trace is not displayed 94 MEMORY TRACE The MARKER ON MEMORY is selected when the memory trace is not displayed 113 STATE DATA FILES ON DISK There are no files on the flexible disk with extensions _D or S for LIF format or STA or DTA for DOS fo
94. move the channel 1 marker to the maximum point on the trace Record the marker reading in the calculation sheet Maker Reading column for into crosstalk Press Ch2 Trigger SINGLE to make a sweep on channel 2 Wait for the completion of the sweep Press Search to move the channel 2 marker to the maximum point on the trace B R Record the marker reading in the calculation sheet Maker Reading column for R into B crosstalk Performance Tests 2 25 8 Press Sweep COUPLED CH ON off change the 4395A test settings in accordance with the Table 2 11 and repeat step 7 for each setting 2 26 Performance Tests 9 INPUT IMPEDANCE TEST NA Description This test uses a network analyzer and a T R test set to measure the return losses of the 4395A R A and B inputs One port full calibration is performed to measured the return loss accurately The 4395A has no capability for making an measurement The 4395A can measure the return loss of the B or input using A R or B R measurement capability of the 4395A However it cannot measure the R input s return loss Therefore a network analyzer is used in this test Specification Return Loss Qatt 10 dB Return Loss Frequency att 10 dB 100 kHz lt freq lt 100 MHz 225 dB 100 MHz freq 215 dB Test Equipment Network Analyzer me ee ec hme e hee 8753 B C T R
95. oven reference clock Required Equipment Frequency Counter wana aa aaa 5334B Frequency Standard 5061B BNC cable 61 cm PN 8120 1339 BNC cable 122 em PN 8120 1340 N m BNC f adapter PN 1250 0780 Procedure Note HP VEE Adjustment Program is not required in this adjustment Follow the procedures below and adjust proper item manually Li Required Equipment Frequency Counter 5334B BNC cable 61 cm PN 8120 1339 Procedure 1 Turn the 4395A OFF 2 gain access to the adjustment components remove the top cover of the 43954 3 Remove the BNC BNC adapter from 10 MHz INT REF Output and REF OVEN connecters 4 Connect the test equipments as shown in Figure 5 5 to monitor the 10 MHz reference clock 5 10 Adjustments Frequency Standard BNC m BNC m Cable 122 cm Frequency Counter 00000000 N m BNC f Adapter BNC m BNC m Cable
96. suffix was encountered after a numeric element that does not allow suffixes 140 Character data error This error as well as errors 141 through 148 are generated when analyzing the syntax of a character data element This particular error message is used if the analyzer cannot detect a more specific error 141 Invalid character data Either the character data element contains an invalid character or the particular element received is not valid for the header 144 Character data too long The character data element contains more than twelve characters see IEEE 488 2 7 7 1 4 148 Character data not allowed legal character data element was encountered where prohibited by the analyzer 150 String data error This error as well as errors 151 and 158 are generated when analyzing the syntax of a string data element This particular error message is used if the analyzer cannot detect a more specific error 151 Invalid string data A string data element was expected but was invalid for some reason see IEEE 488 2 7 7 5 2 For example an END message was received before the terminal quote character 158 String data not allowed string data element was encountered but was not allowed by the analyzer at this point in parsing Messages 25 Error Messages in Numerical Order 160 Block data error This error as well as errors 161 and 168 are generated when analyzing the syntax of a
97. the cable connections of the 4395A A and R inputs as shown in setup 2 of Figure 2 18 f Press Trigger SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep g Set the 4395A controls as follows Control Settings Key Strokes 2 46 Performance Tests Active Channel CH 1 ch 1 Data Math DATA MEM Display DATA MATH DATA MEM GAIN 5 a Auto Scale Scale Ref AUTO SCALE Active Channel CH 2 ch 2 Data Math DATA MEM Display DATA MATH DATA MEM GAIN 5 a Auto Scale Scale Ref AUTO SCALE h Press Ch 1 Search MAX and Search MIN to move the channel 1 marker to the maximum and minimum points on the trace Compare the absolute values at the maximum and minimum points i Record the larger value in the performance test record Test Result column for A R magnitude ratio J Press Ch 2 Marker MKR STOP MORE ELECTRICAL DELAY MENU MKR DELAY ELECTRICAL DELAY Then press or I and turn the RPG knob to vary the electrical delay until the trace is in the most horizontal position k Press PHASE OFFSET and enter the trace mean value using numeric keys The trace mean value is displayed as a marker statistic mean in the upper right hand corner of the display l Press Search and Search MIN to move the channel 2 marker to the maximum and minimum points on the trace Compare the absolute values at the maximum and minimum poi
98. third order intermodulation distortion product at the upper frequency Record the marker reading in the calculation sheet Upper Frequency column Press Marker AMODE AMODE OFF Compare the two marker readings at the lower and upper frequencies in the calculation sheet Record the larger value in the performance test record Test Result column Performance Tests 2 75 20 OTHER SPURIOUS SA Description This test measures the level of spurious signals generated by causes other than the second harmonic distortion and the third order intermodulation distortion This test applies several CW frequency signals to the 4395A R input and then measures the spurious signal level at a frequency range where the spurious signal is most likely to be observed Specification Other spurious input signal freq lt 500 MHz lt 70 dBc 1 single tone input with full scale input 10 dB RBW lt 100 kHz 1 lt freq offset lt 300 MHz Test Equipment Signal Generator er e ee 8663A Type N Cable 61 em 11500B or part of 11851B BNC cable 122 em PN 8120 1840 Procedure 1 Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2 29 Note Connect the signal generator s 10 MHz frequency reference output to the 4395A EXT REF Input on the rear p
99. this test That is the fidelity is not checked at signal levels lt 60 dB from the reference level at an RBW of 10 kHz and at signal levels lt 50 dB from the reference level at an RBW of 1 MHz These tests are not necessary because the fidelity performance at these levels are theoretically determined by the fidelity at higher signal levels and the fidelity at an RBW of lt 3 kHz 6 and 10 dB fixed attenuators with a VSWR of lt 1 015 are connected to the signal generator output connector and the 4395A 5 input respectively These fixed attenuators are used to reduce the measurement uncertainties caused by mismatch error When they are used the measurement uncertainties listed in the performance test record are valid Specification Amplitude fidelity Log scale Range Amplitude Fidelity relative to full scale input level 0 dB gt range gt 30 dB 0 05 dB 30 dB gt range gt 40 dB 0 07 dB 40 dB gt range gt 50 dB 0 15 dB 50 dB gt range gt 60 dB 0 35 dB 60 dB gt range gt 70 dB 0 8 dB 70 dB gt range gt 80 dB 1 8 dB 1 2345 C RBW 10 Hz 20 dBm gt ref value gt 30 dBm ref input level full scale input level 10 dB Test Equipment Signal Generator hme e e e e ne emere 8663A Step Attenuator 10 dB step VSWR lt 1 02 8496G Opt 001 and H60 Attenuator Driver hh eh r
100. your nearest Agilent Technologies office for adjustment or repair Messages 17 Error Messages in Numerical Order 50 CONT SWITCHING MAY DAMAGE MECH SW RF output power switch input attenuator switch at input R A B or internal mechanical switch in the S parameter test set is switching sweep by sweep because RF power level or the input attenuator setting is different between two channels and the dual channel is turn on or continuous trigger mode is selected after full 2 port calibration is performed when 4395A is used with the S parameter test set To avoid premature wearing out of the output power switch input attenuator switch or internal switch of the S parameter test set change trigger type to HOLD SINGLE or NUMBER of GROUP to hold sweep after measurement required Or for example turn off the dual channel or set the power level and the input attenuator of both channels to the same setting 54 TOO MUCH DATA Either there is too much binary data to send to the analyzer when the data transfer format is FORM 2 FORM 3 or FORM 5 or the amount of data is greater than the number of points 55 NOT ENOUGH DATA The amount of data sent to the analyzer is less than that expected GPIB on y 56 OPTION NOT INSTALLED This error occurs when an GPIB command which is optional command is sent and the analyzer is not installed the option GPIB on y Please confirm options installed to the analyzer using OPT command see Programming Ma
101. 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 200 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 225 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 250 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 275 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 300 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 325 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 350 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 375 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 400 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 425 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 450 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 475 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 500 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 18 SECOND HARMONIC DISTORTION TEST Frequency Test Result Test Limit Measurement Uncertainty 50 1 MHz lt T0 dBc 2 65 dB 19 THIRD ORDER INTERMODULATION DISTORTION TEST Frequency Test Result Test Limit Measurement Uncertainty 100 2 MHz lt 70 dBc 4 3 dB Performance Test Record 4 23 20 OTHER SPURIOUS TEST Input Spurious Test Result Test Limit Measurement Frequency Frequency Uncertainty 276 8666667 MHz 300 MHz lt 70 dBc 2 52 dB 16 3 MHz 1 MHz lt 70 dBe 2 52 dB 212 8 MHz 210 MHz lt 70 dBe 2 52 dB 205 9 MHz 210 MHz lt T0 dBc 2 52 dB 213 7333333 MHz 210 MHz lt 70 dBe 2 52 dB 209 1333333 MHz 210 MHz lt 70 dBe 2 52 dB 6 897 MHz 6 900 MHz lt 70 dBe 2 14 dB 6 897 MHz 6 903 MHz lt 70 dBe 2 14 dB 256 897 MHz 256 900 MHz lt 70 dBe 2 14 dB 256 897 MHz 256 903 MHz lt 70 dBe 2 14 dB 494 397 MHz 494 400 MHz lt 70 dBe 2 14 dB 494 397 MHz 494 403 MHz lt 70 dBe
102. 1 7812 0644 2190 0577 Agilent Part 0380 Ref 1 2 3 4 Desig CCS06033 506034 Figure 10 20 Rear Assembly Parts 5 8 Table 10 22 Rear Assembly Parts 5 8 Ref Agilent Part C Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 4970 66532 5 1 A321IBASIC I F 28480 E4970 66532 2 3050 1546 1 1 WASHER FLAT NM 28480 3050 1546 3 2190 0054 9 1 WSHR LK INTL T 28480 2190 0054 4 2950 0054 1 1 NUT HEX DBL CHAM 28480 2950 0054 5 1251 7812 0 8 JACKSCREW 28480 1251 7812 10 24 Replaceable Parts ROAR CCS06035 Figure 10 21 Rear Assembly Parts Opt 1D5 6 8 1D5 6 8 Table 10 23 Rear Assembly Parts Opt 2 BBS 3 22158 Hd 5222 OIN A T 5 95 a A Bud PA ch m E gt O On gt gt lt GIS 2 21 geo T 1s Z o gt 9 Replaceable Parts 10 25 ccs06061 Figure 10 22 Rear Assembly Parts 7 8 Table 10 24 Rear Assembly Parts 7 8 Ref Agilent Part C Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 2110 1303 5 1 FUSE5A 2
103. 10 25 Main Frame Assembly Parts 2 23 Table 10 27 Main Frame Assembly Parts 2 23 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 5021 5887 2 4 STRUT COR 497 8D 28480 5021 5837 2 0515 1719 3 25 SCR MAXIO 28480 0515 1719 3 0515 1668 1 16 SCR MTRC SPCLY 28480 0515 1668 Replaceable Parts 10 29 506040 Figure 10 26 Main Frame Assembly Parts FDD Assembly 3 23 Table 10 28 Main Frame Assembly Parts FDD Assembly 3 23 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 04896 01275 4 3 ANGLE 28480 04396 01275 2 04396 25004 7 1 SPONGE 28480 04396 25004 3 0950 3334 4 1 FDD3 5 2MODE 28480 0950 3334 4 04396 61651 6 1 FLAT CBL ASSY 28480 04396 61651 5 04396 61672 1 1 WIRE ASSY 28480 04396 61672 6 0515 0914 8 31 SCR MACH M3X0 5 28480 0515 0914 10 30 Replaceable Parts A 506041 Main Frame Assembly Parts FDD Assembly 4 23 27 Figure 10 Frame Assembly Parts FDD Assembly 4 23 In Ma Table 10 29 alz m 62 AES 5 2 2 5 dlo So zz OIN A 25 4 gt 5 2 22 a zm O 2 A E gt 3 ZO 5 H ost Z als 5 5 5 415 4 Replaceable Parts 10 31 506042 Figure 10 28 Main Frame A
104. 3 For example query followed by DAB or GET before response was completely sent 420 Query UNTERMINATED condition causing an unterminated query error occurred see IEEE 488 2 6 3 2 2 For example the analyzer was addressed to talk and an incomplete program message was received by the controller Messages 29 REGIONAL SALES AND SUPPORT OFFICES For more information about Agilent Technologies test and measurement products applications services and for a current sales office listing visit our web site http www agilent com find tmdir You can also contact one of the following centers and ask for a test and measurement sales representative 11 29 99 United States fax 61 3 9272 0749 Agilent Technologies tel 0 800 738 378 New Zealand Test and Measurement Call Center fax 64 4 802 6881 P O Box 4026 Englewood CO 80155 4026 Asia Pacific tel 1 800 452 4844 Agilent Technologies 24 F Cityplaza One 1111 King s Road Canada Taikoo Shing Hong Kong Agilent Technologies Canada Inc tel 852 3197 7777 5150 Spectrum Way fax 852 2506 9284 Mississauga Ontario L4W 5GI tel 1 877 894 4414 Europe Agilent Technologies Test amp Measurement European Marketing Organization P O Box 999 1180 AZ Amstelveen The Netherlands tel 31 20 547 9999 Japan Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd Call Center 9 1 Takakura Cho Hachioji Shi Tokyo 192 8510 Japan tel 81 426 56 7832 fax 81 426 56
105. 3 11 3 11 3 11 Contents 3 B R Measurement 13 DISPLAY ED AVERAGE NOISE LEVEL TEST Input Input Input B 14 AMPLITUDE FIDELITY Step Attenuator Calibration Value at 50 MHz Amplitude Fidelity Input R Input A Input B Input R Input A Input B INPUT ATTENUATOR SWITCHING UNCERTAINTY TEST sten Attenuator Calibration Value at 50 MHz Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty Input R Input Input B 17 AMPLITUDE ACCURACY FREQUENCY RESPONSE TEST Input Reference at 50 MHz At Frequencies gt 1 MHz At Frequencies 1 MHz Input Reference at 50 MHz At Frequencies gt 1 MHz At Frequencies 1 MHz Input B Reference at 50 MHz At Frequencies gt 1 MHz At Frequencies lt 1 MHz 18 THIRD ORDER HARMONIC DISTORTION TEST 4 Performance Test Record 1 FREQUENCY ACCURACY TEST without Option 1D5 with Option 105 2 SOURCE LEVEL ACCURACY FLATNESS TEST Level Accuracy OOP Level Flatness 3 NON SWEEP POWER LINEARITY TEST 4 POWER SWEEP LINEARITY TEST 5 HARMONICS NON HARMONIC SPURIOUS TEST Harmonics e Non Harmonic Spurious D 6 DC BIAS ACCURACY TEST RECEIVER NOISE LEVEL TEST 8 INPUT CROSSTALK TEST 10 Hz Freq 1 kHz 1 Contents 4 3 11 3 12 3 12 3 12 3 13 3 14 3 14 3 14 3 14 3 14 3 15 3 15 3 15 3 15 3 16 3 16 3 16 3 16 3 16 3 17 3 18 3 18 3 18 3 19 3 20 3 20 3 20 3 21 3 22 3 22 3 22 3 23 3 24 3 24
106. 395A 00000000 509001 Figure 9 1 Probe Power Connector Voltages Inspect the Test Set This procedure checks the operation of the transfer switch in the 85046A B test set 1 Turn the analyzer power off 2 Connect the test set to the analyzer 3 Turn the analyzer power on 4 Press PRESET Meas ANALYZER TYPE NETWORK ANALYZER Refl REV S22 B R Then check that the 22 512 indicator LED lits 5 Press Refi FWD S11 Check that the S11 21 indicator LED lits m If the LED operations are not expected inspect the cable between the analyzer and the test set If the cable seems good verify the test set in accordance with its manual m If the LED operations are correct continue with this chapter unless a test set failure is suspected To troubleshoot test set failures see the test set manual Inspect the Calibration Kit Inspect all of the terminations load open and short for any damage If no damage is found perform the following procedure to verify the short and open If any damage is found replace the termination with a good one Verify Shorts and Opens Substitute a known good short and open of the same connector type as the terminations in question If the devices are not from a standard calibration kit see Modifying Calibration Kits in the Function Reference to use the MODIFY CAL function Set aside the short and open th
107. 4 E4970 61611 1 1 CBL ASSY 28480 E4970 61611 10 50 Replaceable Parts 11 Post Repair Procedures INTRODUCTION This chapter lists the procedures required to verify the analyzer operation after an assembly is replaced with a new one POST REPAIR PROCEDURES Table 11 1 Post Repair Procedures lists the required procedures that must be performed after the replacement of an assembly or the EEPROM These are the recommended minimum procedures to ensure that the analyzer is working properly following the replacement When you replace an assembly or the EEPROM on the A1 CPU perform the adjustments and updating correction constants listed in Table 11 1 Then perform the operational verifications and performance verifications listed in Table 11 1 For the detailed procedure of the adjustments and updating correction constants see the Adjustments chapter For the detailed operational verification procedures see this manual s chapter specified in Table 11 1 For the detailed performance verification procedures see the Performance Tests chapter Table 11 1 Post Repair Procedures Replaced Adjustments Verification Assembly or Part Correction Constants A1 CPU Firmware Installation INSPECT THE POWER ON SEQUENCE 2 Internal Test 2 Al VOLATILE MEMORY Al EEPROM Local DAC Adjustment INSPECT THE POWER ON SEQ UENCE Source Power Adjustment All Performance Test Items Source Flatness Adjustment
108. 4 Program currently running Certain operations dealing with programs may be illegal while the program is running For example deleting running program might not be possible 285 Program syntax error Indicates that syntax error appears in a downloaded program The syntax used when parsing the downloaded program is device specific 286 Program runtime error program runtime error of the HP Instrument BASIC has occurred get more specific error information use the ERRM or ERRN command of the HP Instrument BASIC 301 400 310 System error Some error termed system error by the analyzer has occurred 311 Memory error An error was detected in the analyzer s memory 330 Self test failed A self test failed Contact your nearest Agilent Technologies office or see the Service Manual for troubleshooting Messages 28 Error Messages in Numerical Order 350 Queue overflow specific code entered into the queue in lieu of the code that caused the error This code indicates that there is no room in the queue and an error occurred but was not recorded 400 Query errors This is the generic query error that the analyzer cannot detect more specific errors This code indicates only that a query error as defined in IEEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 7 and 6 3 has occurred 401 500 410 Query INTERRUPTED condition causing an interrupted query error occurred see IEEE 488 2 6 3 2
109. 41 T WIRE ASSY 28480 E4970 61641 2 0890 1480 9 9 TUB HEAT SHRK 28480 0890 1480 10 10 Replaceable Parts 506022 Figure 10 7 Angle Assembly Parts 5 5 Table 10 9 Angle Assembly Parts 5 5 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 6960 0150 3 1 PLUG HOLE 28480 6960 0150 2 8160 0619 5 0 SHIELD GASKET 28480 8160 0619 Replaceable Parts 10 11 506023 Figure 10 8 Front Assembly Parts 1 8 Table 10 10 Front Assembly Parts 1 8 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 E4970 00202 8 1 PANEL SUB 28480 E4970 00202 2 E4970 25001 7 1 FILTER 28480 4970 25001 3 04396 40071 0 1 BEZEL BACK 28480 04396 40071 4 3050 0891 2 WASHER M3 28480 3050 0891 5 0515 1550 0 3 SCR M3 L 8 28480 0515 1550 10 12 Replaceable Parts gu 506024 Figure 10 9 Front Assembly Parts 2 8 Table 10 11 Front Assembly Parts 2 8 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 04896 40008 8 1 GUIDE 28480 04396 40003 2 04396 25051 4 1 KEYPAD RUBBER 28480 04396 25051 3 04396 66530 0 A30 FRONT KEYBOARD 28480 04396 66530 4 0515 1550 0 16 SCR M3 L 8 28480 0515 1550 Replaceable Parts 10 13 CDS11046 Figure 10 10
110. 480 E4970 66502 A3 E4970 66503 0 1 TRACKING SOURCE 28480 E4970 66503 E4970 69503 1 TRACKING SOURCE 28480 E4970 69503 rebuilt exchange A5 E4970 66515 4 1 LOCALSYNTHESIZER 28480 E4970 66515 E4970 69515 LOCAL SYNTHESIZER 28480 E4970 69515 rebuilt exchange AT E4970 66507 4 1 FREQ CONVERTER 28480 E4970 66507 E4970 69507 FREQ CONVERTER 28480 E4970 69507 rebuilt exchange A8 E4970 66508 5 1 DIGITALIF 28480 E4970 66508 E4970 69508 DIGITAL IF 28480 E4970 69508 rebuilt exchange A40 0950 3246 7 1 PRE REGULATOR 28480 0950 3246 A50 E4970 66550 7 1 DC DC CONVERTER 28480 E4970 66550 51 E4970 66551 8 1 GSP 28480 E4970 66551 Replaceable Parts 10 5 1 A20 Under A1 5 Coverd with the A9 Case Shield CCS06017 Figure 10 2 Bottom View Major Assemblies Table 10 4 Bottom View Major Assemblies Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number A1 E4970 66501 8 1 Board 28480 E4970 66501 A9 E4970 66509 6 1 INPUT MULTIPLEXER 28480 E4970 66509 E4970 69509 INPUT MULTIPLEXER 28480 E4970 69509 rebuilt exchange 20 4970 66520 1 1 MOTHER BOARD 28480 E4970 66520 A53 0950 3334 1 1 FDD 28480 0950 3334 10 6 Replaceable Parts 506018 Figure 10 3 Angle Assembly Parts 1 5 Table 10 5 Angle Assembly Parts 1 5 Ref Ag
111. 480 2950 0035 10 20 Replaceable Parts 506031 Figure 10 17 Rear Assembly Parts 2 8 Table 10 19 Rear Assembly Parts 2 8 Ref Agilent Part C Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 4970 61621 3 1 RF CBL ASSY 28480 E4970 61621 2 E4970 61622 4 1 RF CBL ASSY 28480 E4970 61622 3 E4970 61627 9 1 RF CBL ASSY Opt 105 28480 E4970 61627 4 04396 61635 6 1 RF CBL ASSY 28480 04396 61635 5 04396 61637 8 1 CBL ASSY Opt 106 28480 04396 61637 Replaceable Parts 10 21 506032 Figure 10 18 Rear Assembly Parts 3 8 Table 10 20 Rear Assembly Parts 3 8 Ref Agilent Part C Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 04396 61001 0 1 FAN ASSY 28480 04396 61001 2 0515 1598 6 4 SCRSKT HEAD 28480 0515 1598 3 2190 0586 2 4 WSHR LK HLCL 28480 2190 0586 4 3050 0893 9 4 WSHR FL 28480 3050 0893 10 22 Replaceable Parts Number E4970 66533 Mfr Part 1251 7812 0380 0644 2190 0577 28480 28480 28480 28480 Mfr Replaceable Parts 10 23 ion t 1p Descri LK HLCL Rear Assembly Parts 4 8 A33 EXT I O JACKSCREW STDF HEX M FEM WSHR 1 8 2 2 Figure 10 19 Rear Assembly Parts 4 8 Table 10 21 C Qty D 6 0 4 1 Number 4970 66533 125
112. 50 2924 6 1 A54INVERTER CCFT 28480 0950 2924 4 0515 0977 3 2 SCR MACH 2 04 28480 0515 0977 Manual Changes 3 506026 Figure 2 Front Assembly Parts 4 7 Table A 4 Front Assembly Parts 4 7 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 2090 0584 8 1 A52 LCD 8 5IN 28480 2090 0534 2 04396 25071 8 1 GASKET 28480 04396 25071 A 4 Manual Changes 506027 Figure A 3 Front Assembly Parts 5 7 Table A 5 Front Assembly Parts 5 7 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 04896 61708 4 1 FLEX PCBD ASSY 28480 04396 61708 2 04396 61709 5 1 CABLE ASSY 28480 04396 61709 3 0515 1550 0 16 SCR M3 L 8 28480 0515 1550 Manual Changes 5 506028 Figure 4 Front Assembly Parts 6 Front Assembly Parts 6 7 6 Table A gals ii 5 amp Sg Z 19 43 2 SSI m Ola a A m a a oo m gt ce O un gt gt ul m ZI 2 FE a B ERIS A 6 Manual Changes 2 Change the Replaceable Parts as following 506040 Figure 5 Main Fra
113. 50V 28480 2110 1303 2 6960 0027 3 1 PLUG HOLE 28480 6960 0027 3 1252 4690 8 1 DUST COVER 28480 1252 4690 4 04396 87111 7 1 LABEL 28480 04396 87111 5 6960 0041 1 2 PLUG HOLE 28480 6960 0041 10 26 Replaceable Parts 506037 Figure 10 23 Rear Assembly Parts 8 8 Table 10 25 Rear Assembly Parts 8 8 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 5100 61640 6 3 WIRE ASSY GND 28480 E5100 61640 2 04396 61706 2 1 CABLE ASSY 28480 04396 61706 3 1400 0611 0 1 CLAMP CABLE 28480 1400 0611 4 1400 1334 6 1 CLAMP CABLE 28480 1400 1334 Replaceable Parts 10 27 506038 Figure 10 24 Main Frame Assembly Parts 1 23 Table 10 26 Main Frame Assembly Parts 1 23 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 4970 60001 1 1 CHASSIS ASSY 28480 E4970 60001 2 5022 1190 4 1 FRONT FRAME221 5 28480 5022 1190 3 5021 5808 7 1 RR FR 221 5XFM 28480 5021 5808 4 5021 5837 2 4 STRUT COR 497 8D 28480 5021 5837 5 0515 1719 3 25 SCR M4X10 28480 0515 1719 6 0515 1668 1 16 SCR MTRC SPCLY 28480 0515 1668 10 28 Replaceable Parts 506039 Figure
114. 5A Table 5 1 Required Test Equipment for Adjustments Equipment Critical Specifications Model Qty Multimeter No substitute 3458A 1 Frequency Counter Frequency Range 500 MHz Time Base Error 5334B 1 lt 1 9 10 7 year Frequency Standard Frequency 10 MHz Time Base Error lt 5061B 1 1x1071 year Signal Generator Frequency Range 1 MHz to 500 MHz SSB 8642 8644 8663 1 Phase Noise at 100 Hz offset lt 112 dBc Hz SSB Phase Noise at 1 kHz offset lt 121 dBc Hz Power Meter No substitute 436A Opt 022 437B or 1 438A Power Sensor Frequency Range 1 MHz to 500 MHz Power 8482A 1 26 dBm to 0 dBm Two Way Power Splitter Frequency Range 100 kHz to 500 MHz Output 11667A 1 Tracking lt 0 15 dB Cables cable 50 Q 11500B or part of 11851B 1 BNC cable 61 cm 50 Q PN 8120 1839 1 BNC cable 122 cm 50 Q PN 8120 1840 1 Adapters N m N m adapter 50 Q PN 1250 1475 1 BNC f Dual Banana Plug Adapter 50 0 PN 1251 2277 1 N m BNC f adapter 50 PN 1250 0780 1 50 Q Feedthrough Rejection at 75 MHz gt 60 dB PN 04192 61002 1 Order of Adjustments When performing more than one Adjustments or Correction Constants procedure perform them in the order they appear in this chapter The procedures are presented in the following order Adjustments 5 3 Table 5 2 Adjustment and Correction Constants Items Adjustments and Correction Constants HP VEE Frequency
115. 61 cm CCS05013 Figure 5 5 Oven Reference Adjustment Setup 5 Remove the screw on the TIME BASE ADJ on the rear panel OVEN FREQ ADJ CCS05019 Figure 5 6 Location of the OVEN FREQ ADJ Adjustments 5 11 6 Turn the 4395 ON 7 Adjust OVEN FREQ ADJ on the rear panel until the frequency counter reads 10 MHz 0 1 Hz 8 Turn the 4395A OFF 9 Install the screw on the TIME BASE ADJ on th rear panel 10 Reconnect the BNC BNC adapter and install the top cover 5 12 Adjustments 3 Local DAC Adjustment The purpose of this procedure is to adjust the Local Pretune DAC Required Equipment None Procedure 1 Run the Adjustment Program 2 Select the LocalDac and press OK in the list box 3 Following the Adjustment Program instructions complete this procedure Adjustments 5 13 4 Source Power Adjustment The purpose of this procedure is to adjust level vernier of the Network Analysis source Required Equipment Power Meter 436A Opt 022 437B or 438A Power Sensor e e e 8482 1 Run the Adjustment Program 2 Select the Source and press OK in the l
116. 7840 Latin America Agilent Technologies Latin American Region Headquarters 5200 Blue Lagoon Drive Suite 4950 Miami Florida 33126 U S A tel 305 267 4245 fax 305 267 4286 Australia New Zealand Agilent Technologies Australia Pty Ltd 347 Burwood Highway Forest Hill Victoria 3131 tel 1 800 629 485 Australia
117. 8 an 9 00000 00000000 000 005 00 00 e 00 00 o er DO e O 505001 Figure 5 1 Adjustment Hardware Setup Adjustments 5 5 Preparation for Using the Adjustment Program use the 4395A adjustment program it is first necessary to install an GPIB Card This section describes how to install it Installing an GPIB Card 82340 or 82341 Install an GPIB Card in your computer see the GPIB Card manual The select code of the GPIB Card should be set to 7 The GPIB Card should be the 82340 or 84321 Other GPIB Cards can not be used in the Windows NT environment Installing HP VEE for Windows NT Install the HP VEE for Windows NT in your computer see the HP VEE for Windows NT manual After installing HP VEE for Windows NT run the Configure I O utility in the HP VEE for Windows NT group by double clicking on its icon to check that the GPIB Interface Board is correctly installed Installing Adjustment Program into Your PC Make a directory named 43954 on the C drive and copy the 4395A adjustment program under the created directory Getting Started 1 Start the HP VEE by clicking the HP VEE icon on your PC 2 Load the adjustment program file into the HP VEE as follows a Pull down the File menu from the HP VEE window and sele
118. 80 1252 4690 4 04396 87111 T 1 LABEL 28480 04396 87111 5 6960 0041 1 2 PLUG HOLE 28480 6960 0041 Manual Changes 9 Fuse Selection Select proper fuse according to the Table A 10 Table A 10 Fuse Selection Fuse Rating Type Fuse Part Number 5A 250Vac UL CSA type 2110 0030 Time Delay A 10 Manual Changes 5 Change the Replaceable Parts as following CDS11046 Figure A 8 Front Assembly Parts 3 8 Table A 11 Front Assembly Parts 3 8 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 4970 04002 4 1 Cover 28480 E4970 04002 2 E4970 25002 8 1 Insulator 28480 4970 25002 3 0950 2924 6 1 54 Inverter Board 28480 0950 2924 4 0515 0977 3 2 SCR MACH M2X0 4 28480 0515 0977 5 04896 61709 5 1 Cable Assy 28480 04396 61709 6 0400 0010 2 1 Gromet 28480 0400 0010 Manual Changes 11 CDS11006 Front Assembly Parts 4 8 9 A igure F Front Assembly Parts 4 8 12 Table A E eal 3522 z 33 ZI OIN AN a LD td d lt 0 gt el S SI 2820 lt c Ta m Of A lt A 12 Manual Changes 6 Change the Replaceable Parts as following
119. 855A Broadband Preamplifier Power Splitter and Directional Bridges for example the 11850C D Three way Power Splitter m Calibration Kits for example the 85032B 50 Type N Calibration Kit Inspect the cables for any damage Verify the probe power connector and the TEST SET I O INTERCONNECT connector if they are used Then inspect and verify the accessories that are used in the measurement This inspection consists of the following procedures Verify the Probe Power Inspect the Test Set Inspect the Calibration Kit Verify the Probe Power Perform the following procedure to verify the front panel probe power connector 1 Turn the analyzer power off 2 Remove the power cable of the accessory from the probe power connector 3 Turn the analyzer power on 4 Measure the power voltages 15 V and 12 6 V at the probe power connector using voltmeter with a small probe See Figure 9 1 for the voltages and pins on the probe power connector m If the voltages are within the limits the analyzer s probe power is verified Suspect a faulty accessory Verify the accessory used in the measurement problem in accordance with its manual m If the voltages are out of the limits see the Power Supply Troubleshooting chapter in this manual to troubleshoot the power lines 15 V AUX and 12 6 V of the probe power 9 4 Accessories Troubleshooting 0 V Chassis Ground 15 V 414 25 V to 15 75 V 12 6 11 34 V to 13 86 V 4
120. 95A spectrum analyzer mode This test applies a 50 1 MHz CW frequency signal to the 4395A R input through a 50 MHz low pass filter LPF The LPF removes the second harmonics included in the applied signal This ensures that the harmonics read by the 4395A are internally generated and not coming from the external signal source Specification Second harmonic distortion input signal freq gt 100 KHz lt 70 dBc 1 single tone input with full scale input 10 dB Test Equipment Signal Generator m e m mm emer 8642B Power Meter 436A Opt 022 437B or 438A Power Sensor m eee ee e eh 8482A 50 MHz Low Pass Filter 2 0 0 aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa HI PN 0955 0306 Two Way Power Splitter m men 11667A BNC cable 61 cm two required PN 8120 1839 BNC cable 122 PN 8120 1839 BNC f BNC f adapter PN 1250 0080 N m N m adapter ee een PN 1250 1475 N m BNC f adapter two required PN 1250 0780 Procedure 1 Initialize the signal generator Then set the signal generator controls as follows Controls Settings Frequency 50 1 MHz
121. 96 61707 4 04396 61671 0 2 WIRE ASSY 28480 04396 61671 10 38 Replaceable Parts 506049 Figure 10 35 Main Frame Assembly Parts 12 23 Table 10 37 Main Frame Assembly Parts 12 23 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 04896 61662 9 1 CA ASSY FLAT 40 28480 04396 61662 2 1400 0611 0 2 CLAMP CABLE 28480 1400 0611 Replaceable Parts 10 39 gt A SE CCS06050 Figure 10 36 Main Frame Assembly Parts A9 Input Multiplexer Assembly 13 23 Table 10 38 Main Frame Assembly Parts A9 Input Multiplexer Assembly 13 23 Ref Agilent Part C Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 8160 0619 5 SHIELD GASKET 28480 8160 0619 2 E4970 66509 6 1 A9INPUT MULTIPLEXER 28480 E4970 66509 E4970 69509 A9 INPUT MULTIPLEXER 28480 E4970 69509 rebuilt exchange 3 04396 61663 0 3 CA ASSY FLAT 40 28480 04396 61663 4 0515 1550 0 41 SCR M3 L 8 28480 0515 1550 10 40 Replaceable Parts IE z R EE a CCS06051 Main Frame Assembly Parts 14 23 Figure 10 37 Table 10 39 Main Frame Assembly Parts 14 23 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 1400 1334 6 4 CLAMP CABLE 28480 1400 1334 2 0400 0276 2 1 GROM RND 28480 0400 0276 Replaceable Pa
122. Agilent 4395A Network Spectrum Impedance Analyzer Service Manual SERIAL NUMBERS This manual applies directly to instruments with serial number prefix JP1K E02197 or above and MY41100220 or above For additional important information about serial numbers read Serial Number in Appendix A RE Agilent Technologies Agilent Part No 04395 90120 Printed in Japan August 2002 Fifth Edition Notice The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright rights are reserved No part of this document may be photocopied reproduced or translated to another language without the prior written consent of the Agilent Technologies Company Agilent Technologies Japan LTD Kobe Instrument Division 1 3 2 Murotani Nishi Ku Kobe shi Hyogo 651 2241 Japan Copyright 1998 2000 2002 Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd Manual Printing History The manual s printing date and part number indicate its current edition The printing date changes when a new edition is printed Minor corrections and updates that are incorporated at reprint do not cause the date to change The manual part number changes when extensive technical changes are incorporated February 1998 First Edition September 1998 Second Edition June 2000 March 2001 August 2002 Third Edition Fourth Editi
123. B 1 5 dB 0 23 dB 425 MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 23 dB 475 MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 23 dB 500 MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 23 dB 4 10 Performance Test Record Input Levell 0 dB 20 dB 30 dB 40 dB 50 dB 60 dB 70 dB 80 dB 90 dB 100 dB A R Measurement Measurement Magnitude Ratio Phase Magnitude Ratio Phase Magnitude Ratio Phase Magnitude Ratio Phase Magnitude Ratio Phase Magnitude Ratio Phase Magnitude Ratio Phase Magnitude Ratio Phase Magnitude Ratio Phase Magnitude Ratio Phase Minimum Test Result Limit 0 40 dB 3 0 0 05 dB 0 3 0 05 dB 0 3 0 05 dB 0 3 0 05 dB 0 3 0 05 dB 0 3 0 3 dB 1 8 0 3 dB 1 8 3 0 dB 18 3 0 dB 18 1 Relative to full scale input level 11 MAGNITUDE RATIO PHASE DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST Maximum Measurement Limit 0 40 dB 3 0 0 05 dB 0 3 0 05 dB 0 3 0 05 dB 0 3 0 05 dB 0 3 0 05 dB 0 3 0 3 dB 1 8 0 3 dB 1 8 3 0 dB 18 3 0 dB 18 Performance Test Record 4 11 Uncertainty 10 0120 dB 0 0665 0 0100 dB 0 0664 0 0101 dB 0 0664 0 0109 dB 0 0664 0 0127 dB 0 0664 0 0135 dB 0 0664 0 0238 dB 0 0664 0 0178 dB 0 0664 0 0374 dB 0 0664 0 0575 dB 0 0664 B R Measurement Input Level 0 dB 20 dB 30 dB 40 dB 50 dB 60 dB 70 dB 80 dB
124. BW 1 kHz RBW 1 Hz Input A Center Frequency 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz 11 MHz 20 MHz 101 MHz 201 MHz 499 MHz a Trace Mean Watt Watt Watt Watt Watt Watt Watt Watt Watt 10 xlog a 0 001 10 xlog a 0 001 10 xlog a 0 001 10 xlog a 0 001 10 xlog a 0 001 10 xlog a 0 001 10 xlog a 0 001 10 xlog a 0 001 10xlog a 0 001 1 10xLOG RBW 3 Hz RBW 1 Hz 2 10xLOG RBW 10 Hz RBW 1 Hz 3 10xLOG RBW 1 kHz RBW 1 Hz 3 12 Calculation Sheet Test Result 4 8dB 10dB 10dB 30dB 30dB 30dB 30dB 30dB 30dB Test Result 4 8dB 104 104 30dB 30dB 30dB 30dB 30dB 30dB dBm Hz dBm Hz dBm Hz dBm Hz dBm Hz dBm Hz dBm Hz dBm Hz dBm Hz dBm Hz dBm Hz dBm Hz dBm Hz dBm Hz dBm Hz dBm Hz dBm Hz dBm Hz Input B Center Frequency 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz 11 MHz 20 101 MHz 201 MHz 499 MHz Trace Mean a Watt Watt Watt Watt Watt Watt Watt Watt Watt 10x1og a 0 001 4 8dB 10x1og a 0 001 10x1og a 0 001 10x1og a 0 001 10x1og a 0 001 10x1log a 0 001 10x1log a 0 001 10x1log a 0 001 10xlog a 0 001 1 10xLOG RBW 3 Hz RBW 1 Hz 2 10xLOG RBW 10 Hz RBW 1 Hz 3 10xLOG RBW 1 kHz RBW 1 Hz Test Result 10dB 10dB 30dB 30dB 30dB 30dB 30dB 30dB dBm Hz dBm Hz dBm Hz dBm Hz dBm Hz dBm Hz dBm Hz dBm Hz
125. Bm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm Test Result al b1 a2 b2 2 dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB Calculation Sheet ref 3 23 At Frequencies lt 1 MHz Frequency 4395 Reading Test Result c c 20 dBm ref 10 Hz dBm dB 15 Hz dBm dB 25 Hz dBm dB 40 Hz dBm dB 80 Hz dBm dB 100 Hz dBm dB 200 Hz dBm dB 500 Hz dBm dB 1 kHz dBm dB 2 kHz dBm dB 5 kHz dBm dB 10 kHz dBm dB 20 kHz dBm dB 50 kHz dBm dB 100 kHz dBm dB 200 kHz dBm dB 500 kHz dBm dB 1 is 20 dBm 20 dBm is the output level of the function generator 18 THIRD ORDER HARMONIC DISTORTION TEST Frequency 4395A Marker Reading Test Result Lower Frequency Upper Frequency a b larger of a and b 100 2 MHz dBc dBc dBc 3 24 Calculation Sheet Performance Test Record Agilent Technologies 4395A NETWORK SPECTRUM IMPEDANCE ANALYZER Date Temperature Humidity Serial No Tested by 1 FREQUENCY ACCURACY TEST without Option 1D5 Frequency Minimum Test Result Maximum Measurement Limit Limit Uncertainty 100MHz 550 Hz 550 Hz 34 6 Hz with Option 1D5 Frequency Minimum Test Result Maximum Measurement Limit Limit Uncertainty 100MHz 13 Hz 13 Hz 0 5 Hz Performance T
126. Bw Avg RES BW 3 0 Reference Level 10 dBm Scale Ref REFERENCE VALUE C 1 9 Input Attenuator R 10 dB cale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN R 1 4 On the signal generator adjust the amplitude until the power meter reads 20 0 1 dBm 5 On the 43954 press Trigger SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep 6 Press Search MAX Marker AMODE MENU FIXED AMKR to place the delta marker reference at the peak of the carrier Press Center 1 0 C 2 to set the 4395A center frequency to 100 2 MHz 8 Press Trigger SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep 9 Press Search to move the delta marker to the peak of the second harmonic distortion Record the delta marker reading in the performance test record Test Result column 2 72 Performance Tests 19 THIRD ORDER INTERMODULATION DISTORTION TEST SA Description This test measures the spurious level generated by the 4395A s third order intermodulation distortion at 100 2 MIIz In this test two signals are combined in the directional bridge and applied to the 4395A s R input A T R test set is used as the directional bridge The frequency of one signal is separated from the other with 200 kHz This test measures the level of the spurious products that appear at a 200 kHz offset from the signals The power level of the two signals is adjusted to 26 dBm
127. CCS02021 2 68 Figure 2 25 Frequency Response Test Setup 2 Repeat steps 1 g through 1 k to remove the power splitter tracking characteristic Record the 4395A marker reading and power meter reading in the in 4395A Reading 2 and Power Meter Reading 2 columns of the calculation sheet Remove the power splitter from the R input and connect it directly to the A input Press Meas to set the 4395A to the input Press Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN 1 x1 to set the input attenuator to 10 dB Press Bw Avg RES BW G o in the first column of Table 2 22 Table 2 22 lists the test settings at frequencies gt 1 MHz Repeat steps 1 h through 1 m to remove the power splitter tracking characteristic Record the 4395A marker reading and power meter reading in the in 4395A Reading 2 and Power Meter Reading 2 columns of the calculation sheet Remove the power splitter from the input and connect it directly to the B input Press Meas B to set the 4395A to the B input Press Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN B 1 0 x1 to set the input attenuator to 10 dB Press Bw Avg RES BW 3 0 in the first column of Table 2 22 Table 2 22 lists the test settings at frequencies gt 1 MHz Performance Tests w Repeat steps 1 h through 1 m to remove the power splitter tracking characteristic Record the 4395A marker reading and power meter rea
128. CLAMP CABLE 28480 1400 1391 10 44 Replaceable Parts CCS06055 Figure 10 41 Main Frame Assembly Parts A5 and A7 Assemblies 18 23 Table 10 43 Main Frame Assembly Parts A5 and A7 Assemblies 18 23 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 4970 66503 0 1 TRACKING SOURCE 28480 E4970 66503 2 E4970 66515 4 1 A5 LOCAL SYNTHESIZER 28480 E4970 66515 E4970 69515 A5 LOCAL SYNTHESIZER 28480 E4970 69515 rebuilt exchange 3 E4970 61615 5 1 CBL ASSY 28480 E4970 61615 4 E4970 66507 4 1 FREQ CONVERTER 28480 E4970 66507 E4970 69507 FREQ CONVERTER 28480 E4970 69507 rebuilt exchange 5 E4970 66508 5 1 DIGITAL IF 28480 E4970 66508 Replaceable Parts 10 45 506056 Figure 10 42 Main Frame Assembly Parts A2 DC Bias Assembly 19 23 Table 10 44 Main Frame Assembly Parts A2 DC Bias Assembly 19 23 Ref Agilent Part C Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 4970 66502 9 A2 DC BIAS ASSY Opt 001 28480 E4970 66502 10 46 Replaceable Parts 506057 Figure 10 43 Main Frame Assembly Parts YTO Assembly 20 23 Table 10 45 Main Frame Assembly Parts YTO Assembly 20 23 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 4970 61002 4 1 ASS
129. D m If the LED is still off inspect the A20 motherboard m If the LED goes on the A20 motherboard are verified Continue with the next step Reinstall one of the removed assemblies at a time Turn the analyzer power on after each is installed The assembly that turns the A1 5 VD LED on is the most probable faulty assembly Replace the assembly Remove Assemblies Turn the analyzer power off Remove the assemblies A2 A5 AT A8 51 and A9J2 Turn the analyzer power on Look at the A1 5 VD LED m If the LED is still off inspect the A20 motherboard m If the LED goes on the A20 motherboard are verified Continue with the next step Reinstall one of the removed assemblies at a time Turn the analyzer power on after each is installed The assembly that turns the Al 5 VD LED on is the most probable faulty assembly Replace the assembly Power Supply Troubleshooting 7 11 TROUBLESHOOT THE FAN AND THE A50 DC DC CONVERTER Perform the following procedure to troubleshoot the fan and the A50 DC DC Converter 1 Troubleshoot the Fan a Turn the analyzer power off b Disassemble the rear panel c Remove the fan power cable from the Motherboard A20J18 d Connect a DC power supply a 10 resistance and a oscilloscope to the fan power cable using appropriate wires as shown in Figure 7 8 DC Power Supply GND BLUE FAN LOCK YELLOW FAN POWER RED Oscilloscope
130. DI Agilent Technologies part number Part number check digit CD Part quantity as shown in the corresponding figure There may or may not be more of the same part located elsewhere in the instrument Part description using abbreviations see Table 10 2 A typical manufacturer of the part in a five digit code see Table 10 1 The manufacturer s part number Table 10 1 Manufacturers Code List Mfr Name Location Zipcode 00779 AMP INC HARRISBURG PA US 17111 06369 HIROSE ELECTRIC CO JP 06691 HOUSE OF METRICS LTD SPRING VALLEY NY US 10977 08747 KITAGAWA KOGYO TOKYO JP 09635 TAJIMI MUSEN TOKYO JP 10572 XICOR INC MILPITAS CA 12085 SCHLEGEL CORP ROCHESTER NY US 14692 13160 TEAC OF AMERICA INC MONTEBELLO CA US 90640 28480 AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES CO CORPORATE HQ PALO ALTO CA US 94304 28520 HEYCO MOLDED PRODUCTS KENTWORTH NJ US 07033 73134 FEDERAL SCREW PRODUCTS CO CHICAGO IL US 60618 76381 3M CO ST PAUL MN US 55144 78189 ILLINOIS TOOL WORKS INC SHAKEPROOF ELGIN IL US 60126 10 2 Replaceable Parts Table 10 2 List of Abbreviations QQQUUUUUU gt gt p COMPL 999 DO OO 0 hj po Hi ooo X ZN 5 qt ET FLM ETOX FR INAT OM TG amperes automatic frequency control amplifier beat frequency oscillator beryllium copper binder head bandpass brass backward wave oscillator coun
131. ET GPIB only Correction is not valid for the selected measurement parameter Messages 16 Error Messages in Numerical Order 17 BACKUP DATA LOST Data checksum error on the battery backup memory has occurred The battery is recharged for approximately 10 minutes after power was turned ON 19 UNEXPECTED DATA DETECTED CAL ABORTED The signal measured for the level cal is not adequate for the calibration signal spectrum analyzer mode only 26 PRINTER not on not connect wrong address The printer does not respond to control Check the supply to the printer online status sheets and so on 34 VALID MEMORY TRACE If a memory trace is to be displayed or otherwise used a data trace must first be stored to memory 37 DISPLAY BUFFER IS FULL The display buffer is filled with the overlay traces or traces drawn by IBASIC DRAW MOVE commands etc 44 OVERLOAD ON INPUT B The power level at one of the four receiver inputs exceeds a certain level greater than the maximum input level 45 OVERLOAD ON INPUT A The power level at one of the four receiver inputs exceeds a certain level greater than the maximum input level 46 OVERLOAD ON INPUT R The power level at one of the four receiver inputs exceeds a certain level greater than the maximum input level 48 PHASE LOCK LOOP UNLOCKED EXT REF Input of 10 MHz is not proper or the instrument is needed to adjust or repair Check the external reference signal first Contact
132. EYBOARD Audio Interface FDD PRINTER lt VGA Con TEST SET HP IB EXT VO Control INTERFACE lt PRINTER Con S PARA l HP IB Control DIN KEY DIN KEY A32 IBASIC Run Cont TRIG yo i INTERFACE Control VO Port CCS08011 Figure 8 1 Digital Control Group Simplified Block Diagram 8 2 Digital Control Troubleshooting A1 CPU Replacement When you replace a faulty A1 CPU with a new one remove the EEPROM from the faulty A1 and mount the EEPROM on the replacement In the EEPROM the correction constants data is stored after performing the Adjustment and Correction Constants procedures described in the chapter 5 The data may be valid for the new Al CPU 4395A Bottom View Rear EEPROM DU CCS08012 Figure 8 2 A1 EEPROM Location Digital Control Troubleshooting 8 3 FIRMWARE INSTALLATION No firmware is installed in new A1 CPU assembly When you replace a faulty A1 CPU with a new one perform the following steps to install the firmware into the A1 CPU Ordering the Firmware Diskette
133. GSP m If three beep sound and the LED blinks three time the A51 GSP s VRAM is faulty Replace the A51 GSP 2 Check the A52 LCD Liquid Crystal Display The A52 LCD can be tested using the internal test 70 to 74 a Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 7 0 1 EXECUTE TEST CONTINUE to run the internal test 70 and run the other tests with the same manner b If any defects on the LCD replace the LCD c If no correct patterns are displayed check the A54 Inverter 8 12 Digital Control Troubleshooting Accessories Troubleshooting INTRODUCTION Use these procedures only if you have followed the troubleshooting procedures and believe the problem is one of the accessories Reconfigure the system as it is normally used and reconfirm the measurement problem The measurement problem must be caused by a failure outside of the analyzer that is by one of the accessories Suspect the following typical problems m Operation Errors for example too high an input level in the spectrum measurement or improper calibration techniques in the network measurement m Faulty Accessories for example damaged adapters and RF cables in the spectrum and network measurements faulty power splitter T R test set or 5 Parameter Test Set in the network measurement This chapter consists of the following procedures Perform these procedures sequentially VERIFY OPERATIONS INSPECT CONNECTORS INSPECT ACCESSORIES Accessori
134. ILE DUAL CHAN OFF The Cross channel cannot be turned on when dual channel is off Turn on the dual channel before the cross channel is turned on 82 CANT CHANGE ANOTHER CONTROLLER ON BUS The analyzer cannot assume the mode of system controller until the active controller is removed from the bus or relinquishes the bus See Programming Manual Messages 2 Error Messages in Alphabetical Order 134 CANT COUPLE IN CURRENT INPUTS When one channel measures a ratio measurement and the other one measures an absolute measurement for example A R and B COUPLED CH can not be turned on 114 CAN T SAVE GRAPHICS WHEN COPY IN PROGRESS If you attempt to save graphics when a print is in progress this error message is displayed 1 CANT SET RBW AUTO IN ZERO SPAN The RBW AUTO mode cannot be selected in the zero span The RBW must be specified manually in the zero span spectrum analyzer mode only 127 CAN T SET SWEEP TIME AUTO IN ZERO SPAN The automatic sweep time cannot be in zero span of the spectrum analyzer mode The network analyzer mode allows that the automatic sweep time is turned on 281 Cannot create program Indicates that an attempt to create a program was unsuccessful A reason for the failure might include not enough memory 140 Character data error This error as well as errors 141 through 148 are generated when analyzing the syntax of a character data element This particular error message is used if the
135. Insert the firmware diskette into the floppy disk drive on the front panel Press SYSTEM UPDATE and CONTINUE The analyzer displays Loading From Disk and starts the firmware installation Wait until the analyzer displays Update Complete Press or turn the analyzer power off and on The analyzer starts the operation using the installed firmware Verify that no error message is displayed and that the revision displayed is that of the revision label m In case of unexpected results inspect the firmware diskette for any damage Clean the built in FDD and retry the procedure Digital Control Troubleshooting 8 5 START HERE 1 Check the Power On Sequence See the INSPECT THE POWER ON SEQUENCE in the chapter 6 for checking the Power On Sequence Check the 1 and cn 2 Operations a Press ch 1 and ch 2 alternately b Check that the two LEDs alternately light each time you press the keys m If both LEDs would not light continue with the next Check the A1 Fight LEDs u If the two LEDs do not alternately light the ch 1 LED is still lit even if pressing the ch 2 the A1 CPU is probably faulty Replace the A1 CPU m If the two LEDs alternately light each time you press the keys the A1 CPU is probably working properly Continue with the TROUBLESHOOT THE A51 GSP AND A52 LCD in this chapter Check the A1 Eight LEDs There are eight LEDs on the A1 CPU These LEDs should be in the pattern shown
136. LOG MAG Reference Level 100 dB Scale Ref REFERENCE VALUE 2 1 0 0 x1 Active Channel CH 2 ch 2 Input Port B R Meas B R Format LOG MAG Format LOG MAG Reference Level 100 dB Scale Ref REFERENCE VALUE C 1 0 9 1 Source Power 10 dBm Source POWER 1 9 1 Input Attenuator R 20dB Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN R 2 0 Input Attenuator A 0dB Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN A 5 x1 Input Attenuator B 0dB Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN B 0 a Press Start 1 0 1 to set the start frequency to the first test setting 10 Hz listed in Table 2 11 Press Stop 1 to set the stop frequency to the first test setting 10 kHz listed in Table 2 11 Press Bw Avg IF BW 2 1 to set the IF Bandwidth to the first test setting 2 Hz listed in Table 2 11 Press Sweep NUMBER of POINTS 1 1 1 to set the number of points to the first test setting 11 listed in Table 2 11 Table 2 11 Input Crosstalk Test Test Settings Start Stop IF BW Number of Frequency Frequency Points 10 Hz 1 kHz 2 Hz 11 1 kHz 100 kHz 30 Hz 101 100 kHz 500 MHz 30 Hz 201 Perform the following steps to test the input crosstalk of the 4395A Press Sweep COUPLED CH on OFF b Press Chi Trigger SINGLE to make a sweep on channel 1 Wait for the completion of the sweep Press Search to
137. MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 20 dB 20 MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 20 dB 50 MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 20 dB 100MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 21 dB 125 MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 23 dB 175 MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 23 dB 200 MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 23 dB 225 MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 23 dB 275 MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 23 dB 300 MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 23 dB 325 MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 23 dB 375 MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 23 dB 400 MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 23 dB 425 MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 23 dB 475 MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 23 dB 500 MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 23 dB 4 8 Performance Test Record Input Frequency Mimimum Test Result Maximum Measurement 100 Hz 200 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 2 kHz 5 kHz 10 kHz 20 kHz 50 kHz 100 kHz 200 kHz 500 kHz 1 MHz 2 MHz 5 MHz 8 MHz 10 MHz 20 50 100 MHz 125 MHz 175 MHz 200 MHz 225 MHz 275 MHz 300 MHz 325 MHz 375 MHz 400 MHz 425 MHz 415 MHz 500 MHz Limit 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB Limit 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB
138. MHz 100 MHz and 500 MHz CW frequency signals to the 4395A R input Then this measures noise sidebands at offsets 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz and 1 MHz from each carrier using a 4395A NOISE FORM function Using the noise form function and the delta marker mode the noise sidebands level is displayed directly in dBc Hz Specification Noise sidebands Offset from Carrier Noise Sidebands gt 1 kHz lt 97 dBc Hz gt 100 kHz lt 110 dBc Hz Test Equipment Signal Generator e ms e n e 8663A Type N Cable 61 cm 11500B or part of 11851B BNC cable 122 em PN 8120 1340 Procedure 1 Initialize the signal generator Then set the amplitude to 0 dBm 2 Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2 23 Note Connect the signal generator s 10 MHz frequency reference output to the 4395A EXT REF Input on the rear panel as shown Figure 2 23 With this 3 configuration both the signal generator and the 4395A are phase locked to the same reference frequency to obtain a stable measurement Performance Tests 2 61 BNC m BNC m Cable 122 TO FREQ REF OUTPUT Signal Generator 00000000
139. MHz 200 MHz 225 MHz 275 MHz 300 MHz 325 MHz 375 MHz 400 MHz 425 MHz 415 MHz 500 MHz ii Press Trigger SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep iii Record the trace mean value and the power meter reading in the calculation sheet 4395A Reading column and Meter Reading column respectively The trace mean value is displayed as a marker statistic mean in the upper right hand corner of the display iv Change the 4395A center frequency in accordance with Table 2 13 and repeat steps 2 e ii and 2 e iii for each center frequency Remove the power splitter from the R input and connect it directly to the A input Press Meas to set the 4395A to the A input Repeat step 2 e to test the absolute amplitude accuracy at the 4395A input Remove the power splitter from the input and connect it directly to the B input Press Meas to set the 4395A to the B input Repeat step 2 e to test the absolute amplitude accuracy at the B input Calculate the test results using the equation given in the calculation sheet Record the test results in the performance test record Performance Tests 2 35 11 MAGNITUDE RATIO PHASE DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST NA Description Dynamic accuracy is a measure of how well a receiver measures the magnitude and phase components of a signal as that signal varies in amplitude over a specified dynamic range measure the dynamic
140. NY SEGMENTS The maximum number of segments for the limit line table is 18 223 Too much data A legal program data element of block expression or string type was received that contained more data than the analyzer could handle due to memory or related device specific requirements 54 TOO MUCH DATA Either there is too much binary data to send to the analyzer when the data transfer format is FORM 2 FORM 3 or FORM 5 or the amount of data is greater than the number of points 18 SMALL POINTS OR TOO LARGE STOP 5TOP SPAN NOP 1 is out of sweep range Increase NOP or change STOP value to lower frequency to avoid this error 210 Trigger error trigger related error occurred This error message is used when the analyzer cannot detect the more specific errors described for errors 211 through 219 Messages 14 Error Messages in Alphabetical Order 211 Trigger ignored GET TRG or triggering signal was received and recognized by the analyzer but was ignored because of analyzer timing considerations For example the analyzer was not ready to respond 113 Undefined header The header is syntactically correct but it is undefined for the analyzer For example XYZ is not defined for the analyzer 19 UNEXPECTED DATA DETECTED CAL ABORTED The signal measured for the level cal is not adequate for the calibration signal spectrum analyzer mode only Messages 15 Error Messages in Numerical Order
141. Phase Dynamic Accuracy Magnitude Ratio Phase Frequency Response Displayed Average Noise Level Amplitude Fidelity Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty Noise Sidebands Test Amplitude Accuracy Frequency Response Third Order Intermodulation Distortion Other Spurious Residual Response 1 See the Troubleshooting chapter Post Repair Procedures 11 3 Table 11 1 Post Repair Procedures continued Replaced Assembly or Part Adjustments Correction Constants Verification A9 Input Multiplexer Input DC Offset Adjustment Input Local Null Adjustment Receiver Gain Adjustment IF 8 dB 16 dB Gain Adjustment Receiver Flatness Adjustment Receiver Attnuator Adjustment IF BPF Flatness Adjustment INSPECT THE POWER ON SEQUENCE 1 Receiver Noise Level Input Crosstalk Input Impedance Absolute Amplitude Accuracy Magnitude Ratio Phase Dynamic Accuracy Magnitude Ratio Phase Frequency Response Displayed Average Noise Level Amplitude Fidelity Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty Amplitude Accuracy Frequency Response Second Harmonic Distortion Third Order Intermodulation Distortion Other Spurious Residual Response A20 Mother Board None INSPECT THE POWER ON SEQUENCE 1 A30 Front Keyboard None INSPECT THE POWER ON SEQ UENCE External Test 50 FRONT PANEL DIAG 2 A32 IBASIC I F None INSPECT THE POWER ON SEQ UENCE Check the A32 I BASIC Interface and the mini DIN Keyboard A33 EXT I O None INSPECT
142. Press Trigger SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep li Press Search MAX Marker AMODE MENU AMKR to place the delta marker reference at the peak of the carrier iii Press 1 to move the delta marker to an offset of 1 MHz from the carrier iv Record the delta marker reading in the performance test record v Press 1 to move the delta marker to an offset of 1 MHz from the carrier vi Record the delta marker reading in the performance test record 7 On the signal generator set the frequency to the next center frequency 100 MHz in Table 2 21 8 On the 4395A press Center 1 9 0 to set the center frequency to 100 MHz 9 Repeat step to measure the noise sideband level from the carrier of 100 MHz 10 On the signal generator set the frequency to the next center frequency 500 MHz in Table 2 21 11 On the 4395A press Center 5 0 0 to set the center frequency to 500 MHz 12 Repeat step to measure the noise sideband level from the carrier of 500 MHz 2 64 Performance Tests 17 AMPLITUDE ACCURACY FREQUENCY RESPONSE TEST SA Description This test measures the amplitude measurement accuracy of the 4395A spectrum measurement over the entire frequency range The frequency response is calculated as the accuracy deviation from the absolute amplitude accuracy at a frequency of 50 MHz At frequency ranges gt 1 MHz this test appli
143. Receiver Noise Test Settings Input Crosstalk Test Test Settings Absolute Amplitude Accuracy Test Settings n Absolute Amplitude Accuracy Test Settings 2 A R Dynamic Accuracy Test Settings 1 A R Dynamic Accuracy Test Settings 2 B R Dynamic Accuracy Test Settings 1 B R Dynamic Accuracy Test Settings 2 Displayed Average Noise Level Test Settings Amplitude Fidelity Test Settings Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty Test Settings Noise Sideband Test Settings RD Frequency Response Test Settings 1 Frequency Response Test Settings 2 Other Spurious Test Settings Residual Response Test Settings Required Test Equipment for Adjustments Adjustment and Correction Constants Items Troubleshooting Information for Internal Test Failure Troubleshooting Information for External Test Failure Troubleshooting Information for Performance Test Failure 1 Troubleshooting Information for Performance Test Failure 2 A50 Power Supplies Manufacturers Code List List of Abbreviations Top View Major Assemblies Bottom View Major Assemblies Angle Assembly Parts 1 5 Angle Assembly Parts 2 5 Angle Assembly Parts Opt 001 3 5 Angle Assembly Parts 4 5 1 3 1 5 1 7 2 6 2 7 2 9 2 12 2 13 2 16 2 17 2 19 2 20 2 22 2 25 2 33 2 35 2 38 2 40 2 42 2 44 2 51 2 55 2 60 2 63 2 67 2 10 2 77 2 80 5 3 5 4 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 7 14 10 2 10 3 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 10 10 Contents 13 10 9 10 10
144. ST TABLE EMPTY OR INSUFFICIENT TABLE The frequency list is empty To implement the list frequency mode add segments to the list table 126 CAN T CHANGE NUMBER OF POINTS The number of points of the spectrum analyzer mode cannot be to change manually except in zero span 127 CAN T SET SWEEP TIME AUTO IN ZERO SPAN The automatic sweep time cannot be in zero span of the spectrum analyzer mode The network analyzer mode allows that the automatic sweep time is turned on 128 SPAN 0 ONLY The setup must be zero span and spectrum analyzer mode when turning on the RF OUTPUT 131 FREQUENCY SWEEP ONLY The sweep type must be frequency sweep when the center step size is set 133 CANT CHANGE ON LIST SWEEP When list sweep is selected the following parameters are not allowed to be changed CENTER SPAN START STOP NOP IFBW or RBW POWER DC SOURCE Modify the list table to change these parameters in the list sweep 134 CANT COUPLE IN CURRENT INPUTS When one channel measures a ratio measurement and the other one measures an absolute measurement for example A R and B COUPLED CH can not be turned on 135 COUPLED CHAN BETWEEN NA amp NA OR ZA amp ZA The analyzer types of both channels must be the network analyzer mode or impedance analyzer mode when the coupled channel is turned on It is not possible to turn the coupled channel on in spectrum analyzer mode 136 DC SOURCE OVERLOAD The DC SOURCE output is overlode
145. Tests 5 HARMONICS NON HARMONIC SPURIOUS TEST NA Description This test sets the 4395A RF OUT signal power to 10 dBm and uses a spectrum analyzer to measure the RF OUT signal s second third and non harmonic spurious at several frequencies The OUT signal frequency is set to values where harmonics and non harmonic spurious are most likely to be observed Specification Spectral Purity Characteristics Harmonics 10 dBm output 30 dBc Non harmonics spurious G 10 dBm output 30 dBc Test Equipment Spectrum Analyzer m seres 8566A B Type N Cable 61 cm 11500B or part of 11851B BNC cable 122 PN 8120 1840 Procedure 1 Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2 6 BNC m BNC m Cable 122 cm O EXT FREQ REFFERENCE REFFERENCE INPUT Spectrum Analyzer OUTPUT joo rn oo oo oO oo LECCE Ooo CO COCO COCO oO 00000000 LIE DU ao N m N m Cable 502005 Figure 2 6 Harmonics Test Setup Performance Tests 2 15 Connect the spectrum anal
146. Then set the amplitude to 14 dBm d Press Meas ANALYZER TYPE SPECTRUM ANALYZER Preset to initialize the 4395 Then set the controls as follows Control Settings Key Strokes Frequency Span 1 kHz Span 1 Reference Level 10 dBm Scale Ref REFERENCE VALUE C 0 Scale Division 1 dB Div Scale Ref SCALE DIV 1 e Press Meas to set the 4395A to the R input f Press Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN R 1 1 to set the input attenuator to 10 dB Press Bw Avg RES BW G 0 in the first column of Table 2 22 Table 2 22 lists the test settings at frequencies gt 1 MHz 2 66 Performance Tests h On the signal generator set the frequency to the first frequency 50 MHz in the first column of Table 2 22 Table 2 22 Frequency Response Test Settings 1 Signal Generator 4395A Frequency Center Frequency RBW 50 MHz 50 MHz 300 kHz 1 MHz 1 MHz 100 Hz 2 MHz 2MHz 100 Hz 5 MHz 5 MHz 100 Hz 8 MHz 8MHz 100 Hz 10 MHz 10 MHz 100 Hz 20 MHz 20 MHz 100 Hz 100 MHz 100 MHz 100 Hz 125 MHz 125 MHz 100 Hz 150 MHz 150 MHz 100 Hz 175 MHz 175 MHz 100 Hz 200 MHz 200 MHz 100 Hz 225 MHz 225 MHz 100 Hz 250 MHz 250 MHz 100 Hz 275 MHz 275 MHz 100 Hz 300 MHz 300 MHz 100 Hz 325 MHz 325 MHz 100 Hz 375 MHz 375 MHz 100 Hz 400 MHz 400 MHz 100 Hz 425 MHz 425 MHz 100 Hz 450 MHz 450 MHz 100 Hz 475 MHz 475 MHz 100 Hz
147. UAL CHANGES supplement In additions to change information the supplement may contain information for correcting errors Errata in the manual To keep this manual as current and accurate as possible Agilent Technologies recommends that you periodically request the latest MANUAL CHANGES supplement For information concerning serial number prefixes not listed on the title page or in the MANUAL CHANGE supplement contact the nearest Agilent Technologies office Turn on the line switch or execute the IDN command by GPIB to confirm the firmware version See the GPIB Command Reference manual for information on the IDN command Table A 1 Manual Changes by Serial Number Serial Prefix or Number Make Manual Changes JP1KE00275 or below Change 1 JP1KE00413 or below Change 2 JP1KE00536 or below Change 3 JP1KE01646 or below Change 4 from JP1KE00276 to Change 5 JPIKE002173 JPIKE02196 or below Change 6 MY41100219 or below Manual Changes A 1 Table 2 Manual Changes by Firmware Version Version Make Manual Changes A 2 Manual Changes 1 Change the Replaceable Parts as following 506025 Figure 1 Front Assembly Parts 3 7 Table A 3 Front Assembly Parts 3 7 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 4970 04001 3 1 COVER 28480 E4970 04001 2 E4970 25001 7 1 FILTER 28480 E4970 25001 3 09
148. Volts Mode Display Reading Value dBm Reading Value Measurement Method Syncronous Sampling Conversion NPLC 100 c Press Meas ANALYZER TYPE NETWORK ANALYZER to initialize the 4395A Then set the controls as follows Control Settings Key Strokes Source Power 4 dBm Source POWER 4 a Input Attenuator R 10dB Scale Ref ATTENUATOR ATTEN R 1 9 Input Attenuator A 10dB Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN A 1 Input Attenuator B 10dB Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN 1 0 1 Number of Points 11 NUMBER of POINTS 1 1 Frequency Span 0 Hz Span ZERO SPAN Statistics ON Unity STATISTICS on OFF Then the softkey label changes to STATISTICS ON off 2 32 Performance Tests d Press Meas to set the 4395A to the R input e Perform the following steps to test the absolute amplitude accuracy at the R input i Press Center 1 0 to set the 4395A center frequency to the first test frequency 100 kHz listed in Table 2 12 Table 2 12 lists test frequencies ii Press Bw Avg BW 1 0 to set the 4395A IF Bandwidth to the first test IF Bandwidth 10 Hz listed in Table 2 12 Table 2 12 Absolute Amplitude Accuracy Test Settings 1 4395A IF BW Center Frequency 100 Hz 10 Hz 200 Hz 10 Hz 500 Hz 10 Hz 1 kHz 100 Hz 2 kHz 100 Hz 5 kHz 100 Hz 10 kHz 100 Hz 20 kHz 100 Hz 50 kHz 100 Hz 100 kHz 100 Hz 200 kHz 100
149. When performing more than one performance test perform them in the order listed in Table 1 1 The first failed test indicates the problem you should troubleshoot first If the performance tests indicate that the analyzer is not operating within the specified limits check the test setup If the test setup is correct see the Adjustments chapter or the Troubleshooting chapter for corrective action Note Allow the analyzer to warm up for at least 30 minutes before you execute any of the performance tests 3 Perform all performance tests in an ambient temperature of 23 5 C General Information 1 3 CALIBRATION CYCLE The analyzer requires periodic performance verification to remain in calibration The frequency of performance verification depends on the operating and environmental conditions under which the analyzer is used Verify the analyzer s performance at least once a year using the performance tests contained in this manual CALCULATION SHEET AND PERFORMANCE TEST RECORD The Calculation Sheet and Performance Test Record tables are provided in Chapter 3 and Chapter 4 Calculation Sheet Use the calculation sheet as an aid for recording raw measurement data and calculating the performance test results Calculation sheet entries are provided only for performance tests in which calculations are required to obtain the test results Performance Test Record The performance test record lists all test points accept
150. Y The sweep type must be frequency sweep when the center step size is set 105 GET not allowed A Group Execute Trigger GET was received within a program message see IEEE 488 2 7 7 240 Hardware error Indicates that a legal program command or query could not be executed because of a hardware problem in the analyzer Definition of what constitutes a hard ware problem is completely device specific This error message is used when the analyzer cannot detect the more specific errors described for errors 241 through 249 Messages 6 Error Messages in Alphabetical Order 241 Hardware missing legal program command or query could not be executed because of missing analyzer hardware For example an option was not installed 111 Header separator error character that is not a legal header separator was encountered while parsing the header For example no white space followed the header thus SRE4 is an error 114 Header Suffix out of range The value of a numeric suffix attached to a program mnemonic makes the header invalid 224 Illegal parameter value Used where exact value from a list of possibilities was expected 282 Illegal program name The name used to reference a program was invalid For example redefining an existin program deleting a nonexistent program or in general referencing a nonexistent program 283 Illegal variable name An attempt was made to reference a nonexis
151. Y 28480 E4970 61002 2 E4970 61613 3 1 CBL ASSY 28480 E4970 61613 3 E4970 61617 2 1 CABLE ASSY 28480 E4970 61617 4 E4970 00626 0 1 CASE SHIELD 28480 E4970 00626 5 2200 0101 0 2 SCR MACH 4 40 28480 2200 0101 Replaceable Parts 10 47 506058 Figure 10 44 Main Frame Assembly Parts YTO Assembly 21 23 Table 10 46 Main Frame Assembly Parts YTO Assembly 21 23 Ref Agilent Part C Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 4970 00625 9 1 CASESHIELD 28480 E4970 00625 2 0515 1550 0 41 SCR M3 L 8 28480 0515 1550 10 48 Replaceable Parts ZZ _ 2 CCS06059 Figure 10 45 Main Frame Assembly Parts YTO Assembly 22 23 Table 10 47 Main Frame Assembly Parts YTO Assembly 22 23 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 0515 1550 0 16 SCR M3 L 8 28480 0515 1550 2 1400 1391 5 4 CLAMP CABLE 28480 1400 1391 Replaceable Parts 10 49 506060 Figure 10 46 Main Frame Assembly Parts 23 23 Table 10 48 Main Frame Assembly Parts 23 23 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 4970 61616 6 1 RF CBL ASSY 28480 E4970 61616 2 E4970 61614 4 1 CBL ASSY 28480 E4970 61614 3 E4970 61612 2 1 RF CBL ASSY 28480 E4970 61612
152. a Input Attenuator A 0 dB Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN A 5 x1 Input Attenuator B 0 dB Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN B 0 a UNIT WATT Format WATT Statistics ON Utility STATISTICS on OFF Then the softkey label changes to STATISTICS off Detection Sample Meas DETECTION xxx SAMPLE Press Meas to set the 4395A to the R input 4 Perform the following steps to test the displayed average noise level at the 4395A R input a Set the controls as follows This sets the center frequency RBW and frequency span to the first settings listed in Table 2 18 Control Settings Key Strokes Center Frequency 1 kHz Center 1 k m RBW 3 Hz RES Frequency Span 30 Hz Gpan 3 0 1 Table 2 18 Displayed Average Noise Level Test Settings 4395A Center Frequency RBW Frequency Span 1 kHz 3 Hz 30 Hz 10 kHz 10 Hz 100 Hz 100 kHz 10 Hz 100 Hz 1 MHz 1 kHz 10 kHz 11 MHz 1 kHz 10 kHz 20 MHz 1 kHz 10 kHz 101 MHz 1 kHz 10 kHz 201 MHz 1 kHz 10 kHz 499 MHz 1 kHz 10 kHz b Press Trigger SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep c Record the 4395A trace mean value Unit in the calculation sheet Trace Mean Unit column The trace mean value is displayed as a marker statistic mean in the upper right hand corner of the display d Change the center frequency frequency span and RBW settings
153. a Trigger Manual Trigger TRIGGER xxx MANUAL Trigger Event On Point Trigger TRIGGER xxx TRIG EVENT ON SWEEP Then the softkey label changes to TRIGGER ON POINT 5 Press Trigger SINGLE TRIGGER MANUAL MANUAL to start a power sweep and to set the 4395A power to the first sweep point of 50 dBm listed in Table 2 4 Table 2 4 lists test settings Verify that the step attenuator is set to 10 dB Table 2 4 Power Sweep Linearity Test Settings 1 4395A Step Attenuator Source Power 50 dBm 10 dB 45 dBm 10 dB 40 dBm 10 dB 35 dBm 10 dB 30 dBm 10 dB 2 12 Performance Tests 10 11 12 13 Wait for the power meter reading to settle Record the power meter reading in the calculation sheet Power Meter Reading column Repeat the following steps until a power sweep completed a Press MANUAL to set the source power to the next measurement point listed in Table 2 4 The sweep indicator moves to the last measurement point on the sweep The sweep indicator indicates the last measurement point on the sweep not the current point b Wait for the power meter reading to settle c Record the power meter reading in the calculation sheet Change the start and stop power of the 4395A as follows Control Settings Key Strokes Power Sweep Sweep SWEEP TYPE MENU POWER SWEEP CW Frequency 50 MHz Source CW FREQ 5 0 Start Power 5 dBm S
154. able test limits and measurement uncertainties if applicable The measurement uncertainty shows how accurately the analyzer s specifications are measured and depends on the test equipment used The listed measurement uncertainties are valid only when the recommended equipment is used How to Use The following procedure is recommended when using the calculation sheet and the performance test record 1 Make extra copies of the calculation sheet and the performance test record 2 Follow the performance test procedure and record the measured data in the specified column in the calculation sheet tests where no calculation sheet entry spaces are provided record the measured values directly in the performance test record 3 Calculate the test result using the appropriate equation given in the calculation sheet Record the test results in the Test Result column in the calculation sheet 4 When appropriate copy the test results from the calculation sheet to the performance test record 5 Keep the performance test record for tracking gradual changes in test results over long periods of time 1 4 General Information RECOMMENDED TEST EQUIPMENT Table 1 2 lists the equipment required for performance testing the analyzer Other equipment may be substituted if the equipment meets or exceeds the critical specifications given in Table 1 2 Table 1 2 Recommended Test Equipment Equipment Critical Specificati
155. accuracy this test applies a fixed level signal of 20 dBm to the 4395A R input reference input At the same time it applies a signal that varies from 10 dBm full scale input level to 110 dBm to one of the 4395A s A or B inputs test input It then measures the magnitude ratio from 10 dB to 100 dB and the phase of the signals The signal amplitude at the test input is varied by inserting known attenuation values The measured magnitude ratio values are then compared to the inserted attenuation s calibrated values The phase dynamic accuracy is measured at 3 MHz where the phase error contribution by the individual attenuator segments is small when compared to the test limits In this test a step attenuator with its VSWR lt 1 02 and two 6 dB fixed attenuators with a VSWR lt 1 015 are used Using these attenuators reduces the measurement uncertainties caused by mismatch error When they are used the measurement uncertainties listed in the performance test record are valid Specification Magnitude ratio phase dynamic accuracy A R B R Input Level Magnitude Ratio Dynamic Phase Dynamic Accuracy relative to full scale input level 10 dB Accuracy 0 dB gt Input Level gt 10dB lt 0 4 dB 3 deg 10 dB gt Input Level gt 60 dB 0 05 dB lt 0 3 deg 60 dB gt Input Level gt 80 dB lt 0 3 dB lt 1 8 deg 80 dB gt Input Level gt 100 dB lt 3 dB X18 deg
156. ading directly in the performance test record Use Press Trigger NUMBER OF GROUPS 5 x1 to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep Press Marker to move the channel 1 marker to 50 1 MHz Record the channel 1 marker reading in the calculation sheet for the magnitude ratio dynamic accuracy Use the 4395A reading column corresponding to the input level in the first column of Table 2 15 Press J to move the channel 2 marker to 3 MHz the test result column of the phase measurement corresponding to the input level in the first column of Table 2 15 n Change the step attenuator setting in accordance with the second column of Table 2 15 and perform step 3 m for each setting 4 B R Dynamic Accuracy Test Magnitude Ratio at 50 MHz and Phase at 3 MHz a Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2 16 2 40 Performance Tests 00000000 N m N m Adapter Power Splitter N m N m Cable p 6dB Fixed Attenuation 6dB Fixed Attenuation ma Step Attenuator VSWR lt 1 02 CCS02014 Figure 2 16 B R Magnitude Ratio Phase Dynamic Accuracy Test Setup 1 b On the 4395A set the controls as follows Control Settings Key Strokes Source Power 2 dBm
157. analyzer cannot detect a more specific error 148 Character data not allowed legal character data element was encountered where prohibited by the analyzer 144 Character data too long The character data element contains more than twelve characters see IEEE 488 2 7 7 1 4 100 Command error This is a generic syntax error that the analyzer cannot detect more specific errors This code indicates only that a command error as defined in IEEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 4 has occurred 110 Command header error An error was detected in the header This error message is used when the analyzer cannot detect the more specific errors described for errors 111 through 119 75 COMMAND IGNORED SEGMENT NOT DONE YET The GPIB command the analyzer received is ignored because the segment is editing GPIB on y Send LIMSDON limit segment done or SDON segment done to terminate editing segment 5ee Programming Manual Messages 3 Error Messages in Alphabetical Order 269 COMPENSATION ABORTED Compensation data acquisition process is aborted 267 COMPENSTATION REQUIRED Compensation is required Perform compansation to obtain compensation data 50 CONT SWITCHING MAY DAMAGE MECH SW RF output power switch input attenuator switch at input R A B or internal mechanical switch in the S parameter test set is switching sweep by sweep because RF power level or the input attenuator setting is different between two channels and t
158. ance Tests 2 49 13 DISPLAYED AVERAGE NOISE LEVEL TEST SA Description This test uses the 4395A marker statistics function to measure the displayed average noise level in the 4395A spectrum analyzer mode In this test the noise level trace mean value is measured in linear format Watt Then the measured values are converted to log magnitude format dBm This is done to avoid skewing the data with the marker statistics function Specification Displayed average noise level freq gt 1 kHz ref level lt 40 dBm att 0 dB 120 dBm Hz freq gt 100 kHz ref level lt 40 dBm att 20 dB 133 dBm Hz freq gt 10 MHz ref level 40 dBm att 0 dB 145 100 dBm Hz 1 f is measurement frequency MHz Test Equipment 500 Termination three required 909C Opt 012 or part of 85032B Procedure 1 Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2 20 00000000 500 Termination 502006 Figure 2 20 Average Noise Level Test Setup 2 50 Performance Tests 2 Press Meas ANALYZER TYPE SPECTRUM ANALYZER Preset to initialize the 4395A Then set the controls as follows Control Settings Key Strokes Reference Level 40 dBm Scale Ref REFERENCE VALUE C 4 1 Input Attenuator R 0 dB Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN R 0
159. ance is categorized into two groups performance in the network analyzer mode and performance in the spectrum analyzer mode The third column in Table 1 1 indicates to which group the listed performance test belongs tests can be performed without access to the interior of the instrument The performance tests can be used to perform incoming inspection and to verify that the analyzer meets performance specifications after repair Table 1 1 Performance Tests Test Number Test Name Category 1 Frequency Accuracy Test 2 Source Level Accuracy Flatness Test 3 Non sweep Linearity Test 4 Power Sweep Linearity Test 5 Harmonics Non harmonic Test NA 6 DC Bias Test Option 001 NA T Receiver Noise Level Test 8 Input Crosstalk Test 9 Input Impedance Test 10 Absolute Amplitude Accuracy Test 11 Magnitude Ratio Phase Dynamic Accuracy Test 12 Magnitude Ratio Phase Frequency Response Test NA 13 Displayed Average Noise Level Test SA 14 Amplitude Fidelity Test SA 15 Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty Test SA 16 Noise Sidebands Test SA 17 Amplitude Accuracy Frequency Response Test SA 18 Second Harmonic Distortion Test SA 19 Third Order Intermodulation Distortion Test SA 20 Other Spurious Test SA 21 Residual Response Test SA 1 NA Network Analyzer Mode SA Spectrum Analyzer Mode The test numbers in Table 1 1 are numbered according to the recommended sequence of performing tests
160. anel as shown in Figure 2 29 With this 3 configuration both the signal generator and the 4395A are phase locked to the same reference frequency to obtain a stable measurement 2 76 Performance Tests BNC m BNC m Cable 122 TO FREQ REF OUTPUT Signal Generator 00000000 N m N m Cable CCS02029 Figure 2 29 Other Spurious Test Setup Press Meas ANALYZER TYPE SPECTRUM ANALYZER Preset Meas R to initialize the 4395A Initialize the signal generator Then set the controls as follows Controls Power Settings 30 dBm On the signal generator set the frequency to 276 8666667 MHz the first column of Table 2 24 Table 2 24 Other Spurious Test Settings Signal Generator 4395A Frequency Center Frequency VBW Spurious Reference Frequency Span Frequency Value 276 8666667 MHz 300 MHz 17 95 kHz 100 Hz 100 Hz 300 MHz 30 dBm 16 3 MHz 1 MHz 17 95 kHz 100 Hz 100 Hz 1 MHz 30 dBm 212 8 MHz 210 MHz 17 95 kHz 100 Hz 100 Hz 210 MHz 30 dBm 205 9 MHz 210 MHz 17 95 kHz 100 Hz 100 Hz 210 MHz 30 dBm 213 7333333 MHz 210 MHz 17 95 kHz 100 Hz 100 Hz 210 MHz 30 dBm 209 1333333 MHz 210 MHz 17 95 kHz 100 Hz 100 Hz 210
161. at could be causing the problem Accessories Troubleshooting 9 5 1 Perform an 11 1 port calibration on a port using the good short and open Then press Format SMITH CHART to view the devices in Smith chart format 2 Connect the good short to the calibrated port Press Scale Ref ELEC DELAY MENU ELECTRICAL DELAY and turn the RPG to enter enough electrical delay so that the trace appears as a dot at the left side of the circle Replace the good short with the questionable short at the port The trace of the questionable short should appear very similar to the known good short 3 Connect the good open to the calibrated port Press Scale Ref ELEC DELAY MENU ELECTRICAL DELAY and turn the RPG to enter enough electrical delay so that the trace appears as a dot at the right side of the circle Replace the good open with the questionable open at the port The trace of the questionable open should appear very similar to the known good open 9 6 Accessories Troubleshooting 10 Replaceable Parts Introduction This chapter lists the analyzer s replaceable parts How to order the parts is also described Ordering Information order part listed in the replaceable parts table quote the Agilent Technologies part number with a check digit indicate the quantity required and address the order to the nearest Agilent Technologies office The check digit will ensure accurate and timely processing of the order
162. attenuator with required low VSWR lt 1 02 can be purchased by specifying option H60 Required when an 8496G step attenuator is used in the tests The 85032B includes a type N m 50 termination An 8491A Opt 006 fixed attenuator with required low VSWR lt 1 015 can be purchased by specifying Opt H60 An 8491A Opt 010 fixed attenuator with required low VSWR lt 1 015 can be purchased by specifying Opt H60 The 11851B includes three N m N m cables of 61 cm and a N m N m cable of 88 cm 10 The 85032B includes two APC7 5 N f adapters 9 NDP v Calibration Data Required for Step Attenuator The four performance tests listed below measure the analyzer s performance against a known standard the attenuation values at a frequency 50 MHz of the 8496G Opt 001 and H60 step attenuators 3 Non Sweep Power Linearity Test 11 Magnitude Ratio Phase Dynamic Accuracy Test 14 Amplitude Fidelity Test 15 Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty Test These tests require the calibrated values of the attenuators listed in Table 1 3 The attenuation values referenced to 0 dB setting are required in the calculation sheet The attenuation values used in the tests are listed in each calculation sheet 1 6 General Information Table 1 3 Calibration Data Required for 8496G Opt 001 60 Frequency Attenuation Uncertainty 50 MHz 0 dB 10 dB 20 dB 30 dB 40 dB 50 dB 60 dB TU dB 80 dB 90 dB 100 dB
163. ble 10 15 Front Assembly Parts 6 8 Ref Agilent Part C Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 0515 1550 0 1 SCR M3 L 8 28480 0515 1550 2 E4970 61651 9 1 FLAT CBL FFC 28480 E4970 61651 Replaceable Parts 10 17 1 CDS11049 Table 10 16 Front Assembly Parts 7 8 Figure 10 14 Front Assembly Parts 7 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 0515 1550 0 2 SCR M3 L 8 28480 0515 1550 10 18 Replaceable Parts 506029 Figure 10 15 Front Assembly Parts 8 8 Table 10 17 Front Assembly Parts 8 8 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 0368 0170 5 0 RFIGASKET 28480 0363 0170 Replaceable Parts 10 19 506030 Figure 10 16 Rear Assembly Parts 1 8 Table 10 18 Rear Assembly Parts 1 Ref Agilent Part C Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 4970 00203 9 1 PANEL REAR 28480 E4970 00203 2 1250 0252 6 3 CONN RF BNC 28480 1250 0252 3 2190 0102 8 3 WSHR LK INTL T 28480 2190 0102 4 2950 0035 8 3 NUT HEX DBL CHAM 28
164. button switch Out position of push button switch Frame or chassis terminal A connection to the frame chassis of the equipment which normally include all exposed metal structures Bh o Warning M This Warning sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure practice condition or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in injury or death to personnel Caution This Caution sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure practice condition or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage to or destruction of part or all of the product This Note sigh denotes important information It calls attention to a Note rocedure practice condition or the like which is essential to highlight 5115 Affixed to product containing static sensitive devices use anti static handling 2 procedures to prevent electrostatic discharge damage to component Certification Agilent Technologies Company certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Agilent Technologies further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology to the extent allowed by the Institution s calibration facility or to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members Warranty This Agilent Techno
165. cale Ref REFERENCE VALUE C Ga Input Attenuator R 10 dB Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN R 1 4 On signal generator 1 set the frequency to 100 2 MHz 5 On signal generator 2 set the frequency to 100 3 MHz 2 74 Performance Tests 6 On signal generators and 2 perform the following steps to adjust each generator s signal amplitude to 20 dBm a b C d On signal generator 1 turn the RF signal on and adjust the amplitude until the power meter reads 26 dBm 0 1 dB On signal generator 1 turn the signal off On signal generator 2 turn the RF signal on and adjust the amplitude until the power meter reads 26 dBm 0 1 dB On signal generator 1 turn the RF signal on 7 On the 4395A perform the following steps to measure the third order intermodulation distortion product a Press Trigger SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep b Press Marker 0 O to move the marker to peak of the signal g h generator 1 s signal Press Marker AMODE MENU FIXED AMKR to place the delta marker reference at the peak of one carrier Press Marker C 1 0 0 to move the marker to the third order intermodulation distortion products at the lower frequency Record the marker reading in the calculation sheet Lower Frequency column Press Marker 2 0 to move the marker to the
166. ccuracy is checked at a frequency 50 MHz The level flatness is calculated as power deviation from the power reading taken at 50 MHz Specification Level accuracy 23 5 C 50 MHz 0 dBm output lt 1 0 dB Flatness 023 5 C relative to 50 MHz 0 dBm output 2 0 dB Test Equipment Power Meter 436A Opt 022 437B or 438A Power Sensor hee e e eee 8482A Multimeter LL aaa hme e em e e e e e eh n 3458A 50 Q Feedthrough I Hh PN 04192 61002 BNC cable 61 cm hmm m PN 8120 1339 N m BNC f adapter PN 1250 0780 BNC f Dual Banana Plug Adapter PN 1251 2277 Procedure 1 Connect the power sensor to the power meter Calibrate the power meter for the power sensor 2 Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2 2 2 4 Performance Tests Power Meter an g 8888 L 0000 0000 0000 00000000 O Power Sensor 502002 Figure 2 2 Source Level Accuracy Test Setup 3 Press Meas ANALYZER TYPE NETWORK ANALYZER Preset to initialize the 4395A Then set the controls as follows C
167. ct File Open b Select the file C 4395A ADJUST VEE c Press Note You may be asked GPIB addresses of the test equipment during the program loading Enter the address for each equipment Enter O as the address for the 3 equipment which are not used for the adjustment test 3 Press Start button on the Adjustment Program screen 4 In the Setup window modify the settings if required 5 Press 6 Modify the calibration factor of the 8482A in the window 7 Press OK 8 Select the model number and press OK 5 6 Adjustments 9 Enter the serial number of the 4395A exactly For example JP1E00123 10 Mark installed options of the 4395A The installed options can be confirmed on the rear pannel of the 4395A or when you turn the 4395A ON you can see the installed options before the 4395A starts measurement 11 Press NEXT STEP NIT CAL CC Locall ac Source source FLAT cO IEgaln 5 le CC RCYR_FLAT CC RCVR ATT IF FLAT TEMP Lancel Clear All 505002 Figure 5 2 List Box Note WRITE ID is used to write required identification data into the internal memory of the 4395A INIT CAL is used to delete correction constants 3 See Post Repair Procedure for details Adjustments 5 7 1 Frequency Reference Adjustment The purpose of this procedure is to adjust the 10 MHz reference clock in the 4395A N
168. d 8 10 6 Check the A53 FDD az 8 10 7 Check the A32 I BASIC Interface and the mini DIN Keyboard az 8 10 8 Check the A33 EXT I O Interface TM 8 11 TROUBLESHOOT THE A51 GSP and 52 LCD 8 12 1 Run the Internal Test 3 51 5 2 8 12 2 Check the A52 LCD Liquid Crystal Display 1 4 4 4 4 8 12 9 Accessories Troubleshooting INTRODUCTION 2 2 9 1 VERIFY OPERATIONS MM 9 2 Using 75 Q Connectors with 50 Q Connectors OPP 9 2 Large Spurious Signals in the Spectrum Measurement 9 2 Odd Appearing Opens and Shorts in the Network Measurement az 9 2 INSPECT THE CONNECTORS 9 3 INSPECT THE ACCESSORIES 2 9 4 Verify the Probe Power 0 1 9 4 Inspect the Test Set 9 5 Inspect the Calibration 1 9 5 Verify Shorts and 9 5 10 Replaceable Parts Introduction OZNP 10 1 Ordering Information SNP 10 1 Direct Mail Order System 10 1 Exchange Assemblies 10 2 Replaceable Parts List 2 10 2 Contents 8 11 Post Repair Procedures INTRODUCTION el POST REPAIR PROCEDURES Manual Changes Introduction Manual Changes Change 1 Change 2 Change 3 Change 4 Fuse Selection Change 5 Change 6 Serial Number Power Requirement N Replacing Fuse Fus
169. d Messages 21 Error Messages in Numerical Order 137 DC CURRENT LIMIT OCCURED The output current at DC SOURCE port is reached to an upper limit and the output voltage is reduced so that the current does not exceed the upper limit This message appears when the DC SOURCE port is used in voltage control mode 138 DC VOLTAGE LIMIT OCCURED The output voltage at DC SOURCE port is reached to an upper limit and the output current is reduced so that the voltage does not exceed the upper limit This message appears when the DC SOURCE port is used in current control mode 141 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY If a lot of tasks is executed at same time memory might be insufficient for a while For example running HP Instrument BASIC program printing a screen and sending or receiving data array by GPIB are required at same time Please wait until finishing some tasks then execute the next task 143 FLOATING POINT ERROR OCCURED Indicate that a floating point error occured in the analyzer Data processing may not be correct This error message is used when an internal application was executed for illegal data sent from an external device or when an internal software bug was detected Contact your nearest Agilent Technologies office 146 ON POINT NOT ALLOWD FOR THE CURRENT TRIG The trigger event mode cannot be changed to the ON POINT mode because the current trigger source setting does not allow the ON POINT mode The ON POINT mode is available for onl
170. d at the Chapter 1 Installation Guide of the 4395A User s Guide Troubleshooting 6 5 Internal Tests Failure Troubleshooting Check the Power On Selftest The analyzer performs the power on selftest every time when the analyzer is turned on In the power on selftest some built in internal tests are executed sequentially The first failed test indicates the most probable faulty assembly and you should be replaced If the power on selftest fails and POWER ON TEST FAILED message is displayed execute all internal tests to identify the first failed test Refer to the following steps to execute all internal tests Then refer to the Table 6 1 to know what assembly you should replace Execute All Internal Tests If the power on self test fails and POWER ON TEST FAILED message is displayed you should execute the all internal tests and identify the first failed test To execute all internal tests you should specify test number as 0 in the 4395A service tests mode a Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE TESTS and x1 to access the internal test 0 ALL INT b Press EXECUTE TEST to execute the ALL INT test c Wait until the test result PASS or FAIL is displayed d Press the 1 keys to find the first occurrence of a FAIL message Execute the Individual Test If you would like to perform the internal test individually you should specify internal test number in the 4395 service tests mode a Press PRESET
171. dB 70 dB 80 dB 90 dB 100 dB Calibration Value 1 2 a4 a5 a6 8 9 10 1 Incremental attenuation referenced to 0 dB setting Input Level 4395A Reading 0 dB 20 dB 30 dB 40 dB 50 dB 60 dB 70 dB 80 dB 90 dB 100 dB B R Measurement b dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB Input Level 4395A Reading 0 dB 20 dB 30 dB 40 dB 50 dB 60 dB 70 dB 80 dB 90 dB 100 dB b dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB Test Result bal b a2 al b a3 al b a4 al b a5 al b a6 al b a7 al b a8 al b a9 al b a10 al Test Result b al b a2 al b a3 al b a4 al b a5 al b a6 al b a7 al b a8 al b a9 al 10 1 dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB Calculation Sheet 3 11 13 DISPLAYED AVERAGE NOISE LEVEL TEST Input R Center Frequency 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz 11 MHz 20 MHz 101 MHz 201 MHz 499 MHz a Trace Mean Watt Watt Watt Watt Watt Watt Watt Watt Watt 10x1og a 0 001 10x1og a 0 001 10x1og a 0 001 10x1og a 0 001 10xlog a 0 001 10xlog a 0 001 10xlog a 0 001 10xlog a 0 001 10xlog a 0 001 1 10xLOG RBW 3 Hz RBW 1 Hz 2 10xLOG RBW 10 Hz RBW 1 Hz 3 10xLOG R
172. dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 400 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 425 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 450 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 475 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 500 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB Input B Level Accuracy Minimum Limit Test Result Maximum Limit Measurement Uncertainty 0 8 dB 0 8 dB 0 112 dB Performance Test Record 4 21 Frequency Response Frequency Minimum Limit Test Result Test Limit Measurement Uncertainty 10 Hz 3 0 dB 3 0 dB 0 264 dB 15 Hz 3 0 dB 3 0 dB 10 264 dB 25 Hz 3 0 dB 3 0 dB 10 264 dB 40 Hz 3 0 dB 3 0 dB 10 264 dB 80 Hz 3 0 dB 3 0 dB 10 264 dB 100 Hz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 10 264 dB 200 Hz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 10 264 dB 500 Hz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 10 264 dB 1 kHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 10 264 dB 2 kHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 10 264 dB 5 kHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 10 264 dB 10 kHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 10 264 dB 20 kHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 10 264 dB 50 kHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 10 264 dB 100 kHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 10 264 dB 200 kHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 10 264 dB 500 kHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 10 264 dB 1 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 077 dB 2 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 077 dB 5 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 077 dB 8 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 081 dB 10 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 081 dB 20 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 081 dB 4 22 Performance Test Record Frequency Minimum Limit Test Result Test Limit Measurement Uncertainty 100 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 093 dB 125 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 093 dB 150 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 093 dB 175 MHz
173. dBm b a4 ref 10 dB 10 dBm dBm b a2 ref 10 dB 20 dBm dBm b al ref 20 dB 30 dBm dBm b al ref 30 dB 40 dBm dBm b al ref 40 dB 50 dBm dBm b al ref 50 dB Note Calculate ref in the calculation sheet for the reference 0 dBm first Then calculate test results using the equation and the value of ref Calculation Sheet 3 3 4 POWER SWEEP LINEARITY TEST 4395A Source Power 50 dBm 45 dBm 40 dBm 35 dBm 30 dBm 5 dBm 0 dBm 5 dBm 10 dBm 15 dBm Stop Power Source Power 30 dBm 35 dBm 40 dBm 45 dBm 50 dBm 15 dBm 10 dBm 5 dBm 0 dBm 5 dBm 3 4 Calculation Sheet Power Meter Reading al 4 5 5 a3 a5 10 dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm Test Result dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB 6 DC BIAS TEST Option 001 DC Bias Voltage Level Accuracy 4395A Multimeter Reading DC Voltage 40 V 10 V 4 V 0V 4 V 10 V 40 V lt lt a lt lt lt lt lt DC Bias Current Level Accuracy 4395A Multimeter Reading DC Current a 100 mA mA 10 mA mA mA mA 20 20 pA 1 mA mA 10 mA mA 100 mA mA Test Result a 40 a 10 a 4 a 0 4 10 40 Test Result 100 10 1 20 20 1 10 100 lt lt a lt lt lt lt lt mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA Calcula
174. data element was parsed but could not be executed due to the current device state see IEEE 488 2 6 4 5 3 and 11 5 1 1 5 Messages 26 Error Messages in Numerical Order 222 Data out of range legal program data element was parsed but could not be executed because the interpreted value was outside the legal range as defined by the analyzer see IEEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 5 223 Too much data legal program data element of block expression or string type was received that contained more data than the analyzer could handle due to memory or related device specific requirements 224 Illegal parameter value Used where exact value from a list of possibilities was expected 225 Data out of memory The analyzer has insufficient memory to perform the requested operation 230 Data corrupt or stale Possibly invalid data New reading started but not completed since last access 231 Data questionable Indicates that measurement accuracy is suspect 240 Hardware error Indicates that a legal program command or query could not be executed because of a hardware problem in the analyzer Definition of what constitutes a hard ware problem is completely device specific T his error message is used when the analyzer cannot detect the more specific errors described for errors 241 through 249 241 Hardware missing legal program command or query could not be executed because of missing analyzer hardware For
175. ding in the in 4395A Reading 2 and Power Meter Reading 2 columns of the calculation sheet x Change the test equipment setup as shown in Figure 2 26 BNC m BNC m Cable 122 cm TO FREQ REF Function Generator OUTPUT 4395A 00000000 T N m BNC f Adapter BNC m BNC m Cable 61 cm 502023 Figure 2 26 Frequency Response Test Setup 3 m For testing low frequencies l Initialize the function generator Then set the amplitude to 20 dBm 2 On the function generator set the frequency to the first test frequency 10 Hz in the first column of Table 2 23 Table 2 23 lists the test settings at frequencies 1 MHz Performance Tests 2 69 11 12 2 70 Table 2 23 Frequency Response Test Settings 2 Function Generator 4395A Frequency Center Frequency Frequency Span RBW 10 Hz 10 Hz 15 Hz 1 Hz 15 Hz 15 Hz 15 Hz 1 Hz 25 Hz 25 Hz 15 Hz 1 Hz 40 Hz 40 Hz 15 Hz 1 Hz 80 Hz 80 Hz 15 Hz 1 Hz 100 Hz 100 Hz 150 Hz 10 Hz 200 Hz 200 Hz 150 Hz 10 Hz 500 Hz 500 Hz 150 Hz 10 Hz 1 kHz 1 kHz 150 Hz 10 Hz 2 kHz 2 kHz 150 Hz 10 Hz 5 kHz 5 kHz 150 Hz 10 Hz 10 kHz 10 kHz 150 Hz 10 Hz 20 kHz 20 kHz 150 Hz 10 Hz 50 kHz 50 kHz 150 Hz 10 Hz 100 kHz 100 kHz 150 Hz 10 Hz 200 kHz 200 kHz 150 Hz 10 Hz 500 kHz 500 kHz 150 Hz 10 Hz On the 4395A
176. e marker the peak of the carrier reference level of the amplitude fidelity e Set the step attenuator to 10 dB f Perform the following steps to measure the amplitude fidelity 1 Press Trigger SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep ii Press Search MAK iii Record the delta marker reading in the calculation sheet for the amplitude fidelity Remove the fixed attenuation from the R input and connect it to the A input Press Meas A to set the 4395A to the A input Press Scale Ref REFERENCE VALUE C 1 x1 Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATT A 0 1 to set the 4395A controls to the reference setting for the test Set the step attenuator to 20 dB 2 56 Performance Tests 30 31 32 33 34 35 Repeat step 25 to measure the amplitude fidelity at the 4395A A input Remove the fixed attenuation from the input and connect it to the B input Press Meas to set the 4395A to the B input Press Scale Ref REFERENCE VALUE 1 0 Gea Ref ATTENUATOR MENU 0 x1 to set the 4395A controls to the reference setting for the test Set the step attenuator to 20 dB Repeat step 25 to measure the amplitude fidelity at the 4395A B input Performance Tests 2 57 15 INPUT ATTENUATOR SWITCHING UNCERTAINTY TEST SA Description This test measures the 4395A input attenuator switching uncertainty over the entire range from 0 dB to 50 dB
177. e Selection Power Requirements Power Cable Messages Error Messages in Alphabetical Order Error Messages in Numerical Order Index 11 1 11 1 A 1 A 1 A 3 A 7 A 8 A 9 A 10 A 11 A 13 A 17 B 1 B 1 B 2 B 2 Messages 1 Messages 16 Contents 9 Figures 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 T 2 8 2 9 2 10 2 11 2 12 2 13 2 14 2 15 2 16 2 17 2 18 2 19 2 20 2 21 2 22 2 23 2 24 2 25 2 26 2 27 2 28 2 29 2 30 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 T 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 Frequency Accuracy Test Setup Source Level Accuracy Test Setup Source Level Flatness Test Setup Non sweep Power Linearity Test Setup Power Sweep Linearity Test Setup Harmonics Test Setup DC Bias Voltage Level Test Setup DC Bias Current Level Test Setup Receiver Noise Level Test Setup Input Crosstalk Test Setup Impedance Test Setup Absolute Amplitude Accuracy Test Setup 1 Absolute Amplitude Accuracy Test Setup 2 A R Magnitude Ratio Phase Dynamic Accuracy Test Setup 1 Magnitude Ratio Phase Dynamic Accuracy Test Setup 2 B R Magnitude Ratio Phase Dynamic Accuracy Test Setup 1 B R Magnitude Ratio Phase Dynamic Accuracy Test Setup 2 A R Magnitude Ratio Phase Frequency Response Test Setup B R Magnitude Ratio Phase Frequency Response Test Setup Average Noise Level Test Setup Amplitude Fidelity Test Setup 1 Input Attenuator Accuracy Test Setup Nois
178. e Sidebands Test Setup Frequency Response Test Setup 1 Frequency Response Test Setup 2 Frequency Response Test Setup 3 Second Harmonics Distortion Test Setup Third Order Intermodulation Distortion Test Setup Other Spurious Test Setup Residual Response Test Setup Adjustment Hardware Setup List Box Frequency Reference Adjustment Setup Frequency Reference Adjustment Location Oven Reference Adjustment Setup Location of the OVEN FREQ ADJ Source Power Adjustment Setup Input DC Offset Adjustment Location Input Local Null Adjustment Location IF 24 dB Gain Phase Adjustment Setup IF 24 dB Gain Phase Adjustment Location Receiver Gain Adjustment Setup Contents 10 2 3 2 5 2 6 2 9 2 12 2 15 2 18 2 20 2 21 2 24 2 28 2 32 2 34 2 37 2 39 2 41 2 43 2 46 2 48 2 50 2 54 2 59 2 62 2 66 2 68 2 69 2 12 2 14 2 77 2 79 5 5 5 7 5 8 5 9 5 11 5 11 5 14 5 17 5 19 5 20 5 21 5 23 5 13 5 14 5 15 5 16 5 17 5 18 5 19 5 20 6 1 7 1 7 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 9 1 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 10 10 10 11 10 12 10 13 10 14 10 15 10 16 10 17 10 18 10 19 10 20 10 21 10 22 10 23 10 24 10 25 10 26 Receiver Gain Adjustment Location IF 8 dB 16 dB Gain Adjustment Setup Receiver Flatness Adjustment Setup 1 MHz Receiver Flatness Adjustment Setup
179. e m enn 11713A Type N Cable 61 cm two required 11500B or part of 11851B BNC cable 122 em I PN 8120 1840 6 dB Fixed Attenuation VSWR lt 1 015 8491A Opt 006 amp Opt H60 10 dB Fixed Attenuation VSWR lt 1 015 8491A Opt 010 amp Opt H60 Performance Tests 2 53 1 Calibration values for attenuation settings of 10 dB to 60 dB at 50 MHz are required Procedure 1 Record the step attenuator 50 MHz calibration values in the calculation sheet Calibration Value column 2 Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2 21 Note Connect the signal generator s 10 MHz frequency reference output to the 4395A EXT REF Input on the rear panel as shown in Figure 2 21 With this 3 configuration both the signal generator and the 4395A are phase locked to the same reference frequency to obtain a stable measurement BNC m BNC m Cable 122 TO FREQ REF Signal Generator Y OUTPUT 4395A mm coo co 000 C na Dar 000 20000 GGG G 5 29255 000 00000000 10dB Fixed Attenuation VSWR lt 1 015 6dB Fixed Attenuation N m N m VSWR lt 1 015 Step Attenuator VSWR lt 1 02 502019 Figure 2 21 Amplitude Fidelity Test Setup 1 3 Initializ
180. e network analyzer controls to measure the return loss from 300 kHz to 100 MHz Press Preset to initialize the network analyzer Press Gar Wa Press Stop G O Press Menu SWEEP TYPE MENU LOG FREQ e Press kg IF O f Press CAL CAL KIT 7mm RETURN CALIBRATION MENU 511 1 PORT to initiate a calibration g Connect a type N f open to the end of the test port cable Press 511 OPENS OPEN M Wait until a beep sounds Then press DONE OPENS i Remove the open from the test port cable and connect a type N f short to the test port cable 2 28 Performance Tests 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 j Press SHORTS SHORT M Wait until a beep sounds Then press DONE SHORTS k Remove the short from the test port cable and connect a type N f 50 load to the test port cable l Press LOAD Wait until a beep sounds m Press DONE 1 PORT CAL to complete the calibration sequence n Remove the type N f 50 Q load from the test port cable Connect the test port cable to the 4395 R input On the network analyzer press MENU TRIGGER MENU SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep On the network analyzer press MKR FCTN MKR SEARCH OFF MAX to move the marker to the maximum point on the trace Record the network analyzer s marker reading with an opposite sign in the performance test reco
181. e the signal generator Then set the controls as follows Controls Settings Frequency 50 1 MHz Amplitude 6 dBm 4 Press Meas ANALYZER TYPE SPECTRUM ANALYZER Preset to initialize the 4395A Then set the controls as follows Control Settings Key Strokes Center Frequency 50 1 MHz center 5 9 C 1 wu Frequency Span 120 Hz Span 1 C 0 1 RBW 10 He Goth RES D Video BW 10 Hz Bw Avg VIDEO BW 1 0 Ga 9 Press Meas to set the 4395A to the R input 2 54 Performance Tests 6 11 12 13 14 15 Press Scale Ref REFERENCE VALUE O 1 cate Ret ATTENUATOR ATTEN R 1 0 1 to set the 4395A controls to the reference setting for the test Set the step attenuator to 10 dB Perform the following steps to measure the amplitude fidelity a On the 4395A press Search to move the marker to the peak of the carrier b On the signal generator adjust the amplitude until the 4395A marker reads 20 dB 0 1 dB c On the 4395A press Trigger SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep d Press Search MAX Marker AMODE MENU FIXED AMKR to place the delta reference marker on the peak of the carrier reference level of the amplitude fidelity e Set the step attenuator to the first setting 20 dB in the second column of Table 2 19 Table 2 19 Amplitude Fidelity Test Settings
182. ebands Test Amplitude Accuracy Frequency Response Second Harmonic Distortion Third Order Intermodulation Distortion Other Spurious Residual Response 1 See the Troubleshooting chapter 11 2 Post Repair Procedures Table 11 1 Post Repair Procedures continued Replaced Assembly or Part Adjustments Correction Constants Verification Freq Converter Frequency Reference Adjustment Source Power Adjustment Source Flatness Adjustment Receiver Gain Adjustment IF 8 dB 16 dB Gain Adjustment Receiver Flatness Adjustment Receiver Attnuator Adjustment IF BPF Flatness Adjustment INSPECT THE POWER ON SEQUENCE 1 Frequency Accuracy Source Level Flatness Non sweep Linearity Power Sweep Linearity Harmonics Non harmonic Receiver Noise Level Absolute Amplitude Accuracy Magnitude Ratio Phase Dynamic Accuracy Magnitude Ratio Phase Frequency Response Displayed Average Noise Level Amplitude Fidelity Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty Noise Sidebands Test Amplitude Accuracy Frequency Response Second Harmonic Distortion Third Order Intermodulation Distortion Other Spurious Residual Response A8 Digital IF IF 24 dB Gain Phase Adjustment Receiver Gain Adjustment IF 8 dB 16 dB Gain Adjustment Receiver Flatness Adjustment Receiver Attnuator Adjustment IF BPF Flatness Adjustment INSPECT THE POWER ON SEQUENCE 1 Receiver Noise Level Absolute Amplitude Accuracy Magnitude Ratio
183. edure 17 AMPLITUDE ACCURACY FREQUENCY RESPONSE TEST SA Description Specification Test Equipment Procedure E 18 SECOND HARMONIC DISTORTION TEST SA Description MEI Specification Test Equipment Procedure 19 THIRD ORDER INTERMODULATION DISTORTION TEST SA Description Specification Test Equipment Procedure E 20 OTHER SPURIOUS SA Description e Specification Test Equipment Procedure E 21 RESIDUAL RESPONSE TEST SA Description Specification Test Equipment Procedure Calculation Sheet INTRODUCTION 2 SOURCE LEVEL ACCURACY FLATNESS TEST Level Accuracy Level Flatness 3 NON SWEEP POWER LINEARITY TEST Reference 0 dBm Non Sweep Power Linearity 4 POWER SWEEP LINEARITY TEST 6 DC BIAS TEST Option 001 DC Bias Voltage Level Accuracy DC Bias Current Level Accuracy 7 RECEIVER NOISE LEVEL TEST 8 INPUT CROSSTALK TEST 10 Hz gt Freq gt 1 kHz 1 kHz gt Freq gt 100 kHz 100 kHz gt Freq gt 500 kHz 10 ABSOLUTE AMPLITUDE ACCURACY TEST Input Input Input B 11 MAGNITUDE RATIO PHASE DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST Step Attenuator Calibration Value at 50 MHz SE A R Measurement 2 61 2 65 2 65 2 65 2 65 2 65 2 71 2 71 2 71 2 71 2 71 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 13 2 16 2 16 2 16 2 16 2 16 2 19 2 19 2 19 2 19 2 19 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 5 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 7 3 7 3 7 3 8 3 8 3 9 3 10
184. er to an offset of 10 kHz from the carrier iv Record the delta marker reading in the performance test record v Press 1 0 to move the delta marker to an offset of 10 kHz from the carrier vi Record the delta marker reading in the performance test record e On the 4395A set the controls as follows Control Settings Key Strokes Video BW 10 Hz Bw Avg VIDEO BW 1 0 Frequency Span 250 kHz Span 2 5 9 k m f Perform the following steps to measure the noise sideband level at 100 kHz offset from the carrier i Press Trigger SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep li Press Search MAX Marker AMODE MENU AMKR to place the delta marker reference at the peak of the carrier iii Press 1 0 0 k m to move the delta marker to an offset of 100 kHz from the carrier iv Record the delta marker reading in the performance test record v Press 1 0 0 to move the delta marker to an offset of 100 kHz from the carrier vi Record the delta marker reading in the performance test record g On the 4395A set the controls as follows Control Settings Key Strokes RBW 10 kHz Bw Avg RES BW 1 0 Video BW 100 Hz Bw Avg VIDEO BW 1 x Frequency Span 2 5 MHz Span 2 C 6 ww h Perform the following steps to measure the noise sideband level at 1 MHz offset from the carrier uutmkrmaxkey i
185. erator 4395A 4395A Power Meter Frequency Reading 1 Reading 1 1 2 50 MHz dBm dBm 3 20 Calculation Sheet 4395A Reading 2 r3 dBm is 20 dBm 20 dBm is the output level of the Power Meter Reading 2 4 dBm Test Result ref r1 r2 r3 r4 2 dB At Frequencies gt 1 MHz 4395A Frequency 1 MHz 2 MHz 5 MHz 8 MHz 10 20 MHz 100 MHz 125 MHz 150 MHz 175 MHz 200 MHz 225 MHz 250 MHz 275 MHz 300 MHz 325 MHz 350 MHz 315 MHz 400 MHz 425 MHz 450 MHz 415 MHz 500 MHz 4395A Power Meter 4395A Power Meter Reading 1 Reading 1 Reading 2 Reading 2 at b1 a2 2 dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm Test Result al b1 a2 b2 2 dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB Calculation Sheet ref 3 21 At Frequencies lt 1 MHz Frequency 1 Input B Reference at 50 MHz
186. es Troubleshooting 9 1 VERIFY OPERATIONS The measurement problem can be caused by improper operation Confirm that all operations connections and control settings etc are properly made during the measurement For detailed information about proper operations see the following manuals Operation Manual p n 04395 90000 Programming Manual p n 04395 90000 Some examples of the typical operation errors are shown in the following paragraph Using 75 Q Connectors with 50 Connectors Do not use 50 connectors with 75 connectors their center conductors are different diameters Using 50 male connector with a 75 Q female connector will destroy the female connector Large Spurious Signals in the Spectrum Measurement Large spurious signals around the fundamental signal can be caused by an input signal level that is higher than the reference level Reducing the input signal level or setting the reference level higher can solve the spurious signal problem Odd Appearing Opens and Shorts in the Network Measurement Opens and shorts can appear as short lines rather than the expected points on a Smith Chart This is a result of some shorts and opens being offset See the calibration kit manual to determine the offset To verify the opens and shorts see Verify Shorts and Opens in the Inspect the Calibration Kit procedure later in this chapter 9 2 Accessories Troubleshooting INSPECT THE CONNECTORS Check the physical c
187. es a CW signal to the 4395A input and power meter through a power splitter The signal level is measured by doing a 4395A spectrum measurement using a power meter and a power sensor Then the 4395A reading is compared with the reading of the power meter to obtain the absolute amplitude accuracy These tests are performed twice while reversing connections of the power splitter s two output ports This is done to remove the frequency tracking between two output ports of the power splitter At low frequencies 1 MHz this test measures the CW signal level of the function generator using the 4395A spectrum measurement The function generator s output level is used as the measurement standard Specification Amplitude accuracy 20 dBm input 50 MHz input att 10 dB 23 5 lt 0 8 dB Frequency response 20 dBm input input att 10d B referenced to level at 50 MHz 2345 C frequency gt 100 Hz lt 1 3 dB frequency lt 100 Hz lt 3 0 dB Test Equipment Power Meter 436A Opt 022 437B or 438A Power Sensor m eee ee e eh 8482A Signal Generator ia 8663A Function Genarator ehh eme em eee ee 3325A Two Way Power Splitter
188. eshooting chapter m Svc Status annotation If the following error message appears on the LCD continue with the INTERNAL TESTS FAILURE TROUBLESHOOTING in this chapter m POWER ON TEST FAILED These error messages indicate that one of power on self tests fails If an other error message appears refer to the Error Messages in Messages If the response of front panel GPIB commands or built in FDD is unexpected continue with the Digital Control Troubleshooting chapter 6 4 Troubleshooting INSPECT THE REAR PANEL FEATURE If the analyzer is operating unexpectedly after these checks are verified continue with Digital Control Troubleshooting chapter Check the GPIB Interface If the unexpected operations appear when controlling the analyzer with an external controller perform the following checks to verify the problem is not with the controller m GPIB interface hardware must be installed in the controller see the manuals of the controller and the BASIC system I O and GPIB binaries loaded see the manuals of the BASIC system Select code see the manuals of the BASIC system GPIB cables see the manuals of the BASIC system Programming syntax see the manuals of the BASIC system Check the Parallel Interface See the To Print section at the Chapter 8 Analyzing the Measurement Results of the 4395A User s Guide and make a hardcopy of the display Check the mini DIN Keyboard Connector the Connecting a Keyboar
189. est Record 4 1 2 SOURCE LEVEL ACCURACY FLATNESS TEST Level Accuracy Minimum Limit Test Result Maximum Limit Measurement Uncertainty 1 0 dB 1 0 dB 0 12 dB Level Flatness Frequency Minimum Test Result Maximum Measurement Limit Limit Uncertainty 10 Hz 2 0 dB 2 0 dB 0 12 dB 50 Hz 2 0 dB 2 0 dB 0 12 dB 500Hz 2 0dB 2 0 dB 0 12 dB 2 kHz 2 0 dB 2 0 dB 0 12 dB 12kHz 2 0 2 0 0 12 dB 60 kHz 2 0dB 2 0 0 12 dB 160kHz 2 0 dB 2 0 0 12 dB 500kHz 2 0 dB 2 0 0 13 dB 1 MHz 2 0 2 0 0 15 dB 3 MHz 2 0 2 0 0 15 dB 10MHz 2 0 2 0 0 15 dB 45 MHz 2 0 dB 2 0 0 15 dB 75 MHz 2 0 dB 2 0 0 15 dB 110 MHz 2 0 dB 2 0 0 15 dB 140 MHz 2 0 dB 2 0 0 15 dB 190 MHz 2 0 dB 2 0 0 15 dB 235 2 0 dB 2 0 0 37 dB 290 2 0 2 0 0 37 dB 345 2 0 dB 2 0 0 37 dB 400 2 0 2 0 0 37 dB 445 MHz 2 0 dB 2 0 dB 0 37 dB 470 MHz 2 0 dB 2 0 dB 0 37 dB 500MHz 2 0 dB 2 0 dB 0 37 dB 4 2 Performance Test Record 3 NON SWEEP POWER LINEARITY TEST Power Setting Minimum Test Result Maximum Measurement Limit Limit Uncertainty 15 dBm 1 0 dB 1 0 dB 0 056 dB 10 dBm 1 0 dB 1 0 dB 0 056 dB 10dBm 1 04 1 0 dB 0 057 dB 20 dBm 1 04 1 0 dB 0 065 dB 30dBm 1 04 1 0 dB 0 078 dB 40 dBm 1 04 1 0 dB 0 078 dB
190. f POINTS 5 1 1 Utility STATISTICS on OFF Then the softkey label changes to STATISTICS off 3 Press Center 1 0 0 x1 to set the 4395A center frequency to the first center frequency 100 kHz listed in Table 2 10 Table 2 10 Receiver Noise Test Settings 4395A Center Frequency 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz 11 MHz 101 MHz 499 MHz 4 Perform the following steps to measure the receiver noise level Press Meas to set the 4395A input to R input b Press Trigger SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep 2 22 Performance Tests Record the 4395 trace mean value Unit in the calculation sheet Mean column The trace mean value is displayed as a marker statistic mean in the upper right hand corner of the display d Press Meas to set the 4395A to A input Press Trigger SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep f Record the 4395A trace mean value Unit in the calculation sheet Trace Mean column g Press Meas to set the 4395A input to B input h Press Trigger SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep i Record the 4395A trace mean value Unit in the calculation sheet Trace Mean column Change the 4395A center frequency in accordance with Table 2 10 and repeat step 4 for each setting Convert the unit of the test results from Unit to dBm
191. fan is not rotating the problem may be in the 40 pre regulator the A50 DC DC Converter or the fan 1 Check the Line Voltage Selector Switch Setting and Fuse Check the main power line cord line fuse and actual line voltage to see that they are all correct Figure 7 4 shows how to remove the line fuse using a small flat bladed screwdriver to pry off the fuse holder For more information about the line cord and line fuse see the Power Requirements in Appendix C CBS05010 Figure 7 4 Removing Line Fuse 2 Check the 50 SHUTDOWN LED When the fan stops the A50 SHUTDOWN LED is off The fan generates a FAN LOCK signal The signal is fed into the FAN LOCK SENSE circuit in the A50 DC DC converter If the FAN stops the FAN LOCK signal is missing Then the FAN LOCK SENSE circuit activates the A50 shutdown circuitry resulting the SHUTDOWN LED turned off Perform the following procedure to check the A50 SHUTDOWN LED on a Remove the analyzer s top cover and shield plate b Turn the analyzer power on c Look at the A50 SHUTDOWN LED The LED location is shown in Figure 7 2 m If the SHUTDOWN LED is on replace the A50 DC DC Converter m If the SHUTDOWN LED is off continue with the TROUBLESHOOT THE FAN AND THE A50 DC DC Converter in this chapter 7 6 Power Supply Troubleshooting FIND OUT WHY THE A50 SHUTDOWN LED IS OFF Use this procedure when the fan is rotati
192. for the completion of the sweep ii Press Marker to move the channel 1 marker to 50 1 MHz ii Record the channel 1 marker reading in the calculation sheet for the magnitude ratio dynamic accuracy Use the 4395A reading column corresponding to the input level in the first column of Table 2 16 Press I to move the channel 2 marker to 3 MHz the test result column of the phase measurement corresponding to the input level in the first column of Table 2 16 h Change the cable connection as shown in Figure 2 17 2 42 Performance Tests 00000000 N m N m Adapter Power ME 6dB Fixed Attenuation N m N m PB LA Fixed Attenuation m L__ Step Attenuator VSWR lt 1 02 502015 Figure 2 17 B R Magnitude Ratio Phase Dynamic Accuracy Test Setup 2 Performance Tests 2 43 i On the 4395A set the controls as follows Control Settings Key Strokes Source Power 8 dBm Source POWER 8 x1 Active Channel CH 1 ch 1 Averaging Factor 4 Bw Avg AVERAGING FACTOR 4 GI Active Channel CH 2 ch 2 Averaging Factor 4 Bw Avg AVERAGING FACTOR 4 a Input Attenuator R 10dB Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN 1 0 Input Attenuator 0dB Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU
193. format 103 Invalid separator The parser was expecting a separator and encountered an illegal character For example the semicolon was omitted after a program message unit RST TRIG 151 Invalid string data string data element was expected but was invalid for some reason see IEEE 488 2 7 7 5 2 For example an END message was received before the terminal quote character 131 Invalid suffix The suffix does not follow the syntax described in IEEE 488 2 7 7 3 2 or the suffix is inappropriate for the analyzer 115 LIF DOS COPY NOT ALLOWED If you try to copy a file between the memory disk and the flexible disk when the format of the memory disk is different from the format of the flexible disk this message is displayed 124 LIST TABLE EMPTY OR INSUFFICIENT TABLE The frequency list is empty To implement the list frequency mode add segments to the list table 250 Mass storage error Indicates that a mass storage error occurred This error message is used when the analyzer cannot detect the more specific errors described for errors 257 Messages 8 Error Messages in Alphabetical Order 311 Memory error An error was detected in the analyzer s memory 109 Missing parameter Fewer parameters were received than required for the header For example the SRE command requires one parameter so receiving only SRE is not allowed 98 ACTIVE MARKER The marker command cannot be execute when no
194. g the analyzer power off Wait a minute after turning the analyzer off 3 Then turn it on 3 Check the A1 5 VD LED a Remove the analyzer s bottom cover b Turn the analyzer power on c Look at the 5 VD LED The 5 VD LED location on A1 CPU is shown in Figure 7 3 The LED is normally on m If the 5 VD LED is off continue with the FIND OUT WHY THE A1 5 VD LED IS NOT ON STEADILY in this chapter m If the 5 VD LED is on the 5 VD power supply is verified with 95 confidence level If you want to confirm the last 596 uncertainty perform steps in the next Measure the A1 5 VD Voltage 4395A Bottom View R o la MM J15 GND 8 5VD CCS07018 Figure 7 3 A1 5 VD LED Location 7 4 Power Supply Troubleshooting Measure the A1 5 VD Voltage Measure the DC voltage on a test point 8 5 VD using a voltmeter Check the voltmeter reading is within 4 59 V to 5 61 V m If the voltmeter reading is out of the limits continue with the FIND OUT WHY THE A1 LED IS NOT ON STEADILY m If the voltmeter reading is within the limits continue with the next step Power Supply Troubleshooting 7 5 FIND OUT WHY THE FAN IS NOT ROTATING If the
195. he dual channel is turn on or continuous trigger mode is selected after full 2 port calibration is performed when 4395A is used with the S parameter test set To avoid premature wearing out of the output power switch input attenuator switch or internal switch of the S parameter test set change trigger type to HOLD SINGLE or NUMBER of GROUP to hold sweep after measurement required Or for example turn off the dual channel or set the power level and the input attenuator of both channels to the same setting 1355 COUPLED CHAN BETWEEN NA amp NA OR ZA amp ZA The analyzer types of both channels must be the network analyzer mode or impedance analyzer mode when the coupled channel is turned on It is not possible to turn the coupled channel on in spectrum analyzer mode 74 CURRENT EDITING SEGMENT SCRATCHED The current editing segment for the list table and the limit line is scratched when the following cases occur GPIB only When EDITLIST edit list table command is received while editing a segment for the list table When EDITLIML edit limit line command is received while editing a segment for the limit line Send LIMSDON limit segment done or SDON segment done to terminate editing segment 165 CURRENT PARAMETER NOT IN CAL SET GPIB only Correction is not valid for the selected measurement parameter 230 Data corrupt or stale Possibly invalid data New reading started but not completed since last access
196. hird column of Table 2 20 e Perform the following steps i Press Trigger SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep li Press Search MAX iii Record the delta marker reading in the calculation sheet 4395A Reading column f Change the 4395A input attenuator setting the reference level setting and the step attenuator setting in accordance with Table 2 20 Repeat step 8 e for each setting Remove the fixed attenuation from the R input and connect it to the A input 10 Press Meas A to set the 4395A to the A input Press Scale Ref REFERENCE VALUE C G x1 Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN A 1 0 x1 to set the 4395A controls to the reference setting for the test Repeat step 8 to measure the input attenuator switching uncertainly at the 4395A A input Remove the fixed attenuation from the A input and connect it to the B input Press Meas B to set the 4395A to the B input Press Scale Ref REFERENCE VALUE C 3 0 x1 Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN 1 x1 to set the 4395A controls to the reference setting for the test Repeat step 8 to measure the input attenuator switching uncertainly at the 4395A A input Calculate the test results using the equation given in the calculation sheet Record the test results in the performance test record 2 60 Performance Tests 16 NOISE SIDEBANDS TEST SA Description This test applies 10
197. ilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 4970 01203 1 1 ANGLEB 28480 E4970 01203 2 1250 2312 3 1 ADPT RF N SMA 28480 1250 2312 3 2190 0104 0 1 WSHR LK INTL T 28480 2190 0104 4 2950 0132 6 1 NUT HEX DUB CHAM 28480 2950 0132 Replaceable Parts 10 7 506019 Figure 10 4 Angle Assembly Parts 2 5 Table 10 6 Angle Assembly Parts 2 5 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 1252 4294 8 2 CIR GRY 28480 1252 4294 2 04396 25003 6 2 SPACER 28480 04396 25003 3 2190 0016 3 2 WSHR LK INTL T 28480 2190 0016 4 2950 0144 0 2 NUT HEX DBL CHAM 28480 2950 0144 10 8 Replaceable Parts 506020 Figure 10 5 Angle Assembly Parts Opt 001 3 5 Table 10 7 Angle Assembly Parts Opt 001 3 5 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 1250 0252 6 1 CONN RF BNC 28480 1250 0252 2 2190 0102 8 1 WSHR LK INTL T 28480 2190 0102 3 2950 0035 8 1 NUT HEX DBL CHAM 28480 2950 0035 4 04396 61631 2 1 RF CABL ASSY Opt 001 28480 04396 61631 Replaceable Parts 10 9 506021 Figure 10 6 Angle Assembly Parts 4 5 Table 10 8 Angle Assembly Parts 4 5 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 4970 616
198. ilent Technologies office for adjustment or repair 193 POWER ON TEST FAILED Power on test failed Contact your nearest Agilent Technologies office Messages 11 Error Messages Alphabetical Order 26 PRINTER not on not connected out of paper The printer does not respond to control Check the supply to the printer online status sheets and so on 284 Program currently running Certain operations dealing with programs may be illegal while the program is running For example deleting running program might not be possible 280 Program error Indicates that downloaded program related execution error occurred This error message is used when the analyzer cannot detect the more specific errors described for errors 281 through 289 112 Program mnemonic too long The header contains more than twelve characters see IEEE 488 2 7 6 1 4 1 286 Program runtime error program runtime error of the HP Instrument BASIC has occurred get more specific error information use the ERRM or ERRN command of the HP Instrument BASIC 285 Program syntax error Indicates that syntax error appears in a downloaded program The syntax used when parsing the downloaded program is device specific 400 Query errors This is the generic query error that the analyzer cannot detect more specific errors This code indicates only that a query error as defined in IEEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 7 and 6 3 has occurred
199. ing 7 1 14033 M3MOd 29094 SGHvOd DOWNY ONY 8Y LV SV ev zw 30V483LNI 1 135 1531 29 OVA 008 YALYAANI Tav esv Guvod A33 05 m A001Nvd A001Nvd 93M A ASL X001 NVA HAMOd GHvOdH1H LOW OZY car 340 day Had lt AGE p dS9 15 4 NMOGLNHS HOLVINDJAH Alddfs HAMOd SNIHOLIMS HALHJANOO 30 90 09 HOLVINDZHJHd DEY 507016 lified Block D imp S Ines Power Supply Li 1 7 Figure 7 2 Power Supply Troubleshooting START HERE 1 Check the Fan is Rotating Look at the fan on the rear panel Check the fan is rotating m If the fan is not rotating continue with the FIND OUT WHY THE FAN IS NOT ROTATING in this chapter m If the fan is rotating continue with the next Check the A50 SHUTDOWN LED 2 Check the 50 SHUTDOWN LED There is LED SHUTDOWN LED on the A50 DC DC Converter Perform the following procedure to check it The SHUTDOWN LED is described in the next 450 SHUTDOWN LED a Turn the analyzer power off b Remove the analyzer s top cover and shield plate c Turn the analyzer power on d Look at the A50 SHUTDOWN LED The LED is normally on
200. iption This test applies the RF OUT signal to the 4395A R input and either the A or B input through a power splitter It then measures the magnitude ratio and phase of the A R and B R measurements The magnitude ratio frequency response is measured as the deviation from the ideal magnitude ratio value of 0 dB The phase frequency response is measured as the deviation from linear phase Specification Magnitude ratio accuracy A R B R 10 dBm input input att 10 dB Freq gt 100 BW lt 3 kHz 23 5 lt 2 dB Phase frequency response Deviation from Linear Phase A R B R 10 dBm input input att 10 dB Freq gt 100 Hz JIP BW lt 3 kHz 2345 C lt 12 Test Equipment Two Way Power Splitter aaa aaa aaa aaa 11667A Type N Cable 61 cm two required 11500B or part of 11851B N m N m adapter PN 1250 1475 Procedure 1 Press Meas ANALYZER TYPE NETWORK ANALYZER Preset to initialize the 4395A Then set the controls as follows Control Settings Key Strokes Statistics ON Utility STATISTICS on OFF Then the softkey label changes to STATISTICS off Dual Channel On Display DUAL CHAN on OFF Then the softkey label changes to DUAL CHAN ON off Source Power 4 dBm Source POWER 4 IF BW 1 kHz Bw Avg IF BW 1 Input Attenuator R 10 dB Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATTEN R 1
201. ired for Step Attenuator 2 Performance Tests INTRODUCTION i FREQUENCY ACCURACY TEST NA Description ML Specification Test Equipment Procedure 2 SOURCE LEVEL ACCURACY PLATNE S TEST NA Description Specification Test Equipment Procedure 3 NON SWEEP POWER LINEARITY TEST NA Description MEI Specification Test Equipment Procedure SE 4 POWER SWEEP LINEARITY TEST NA Description TEL Specification Test Equipment Procedure 5 HARMONICS NON HARMONIC SPURIOUS TEST NA Description Specification Test Equipment Procedure MM 6 DC BIAS TEST Option 001 Description Specification 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 5 1 6 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 11 2 11 2 11 2 11 2 11 2 15 2 15 2 15 2 15 2 15 2 18 2 18 2 18 Contents 1 Test Equipment 2 2 2 18 Procedure M 2 18 7 RECEIVER NOISE LEVEL TEST NA 2 21 Description LL 2 4 2 2 4 4 A 2 21 Specification A 2 21 Test Equipment a a a a a A 2 21 Procedure 2 21 8 INPUT CROSSTALK TEST NA OZNP 2 24 Description 2 24 Specification a a a a A 2 24 Test Equipment a a a a a 2 2 24 Procedure o es 2 24 9 INPUT IMPEDANCE TEST NA MM 2 27 Description LL 2 2 27 Specification
202. ist box 3 Following the Adjustment Program instructions complete this procedure Power Meter 00000000 Power Sensor 505004 Figure 5 7 Source Power Adjustment Setup 5 14 Adjustments 5 Source Flatness Adjustment The purpose of this procedure is to adjust the source flatness Required Equipment None Procedure 1 Run the Adjustment Program 2 Select the Source FLAT and press OK in the list box 3 Following the Adjustment Program instructions complete this procedure Adjustments 5 15 6 Input DC Offset Adjustment The purpose of this procedure is to adjust the DC Bias offset value Note HP VEE Adjustment Program is not required in this adjustment Follow the Li procedures below and adjust proper item using the internal adjustment test Required Equipment None Procedure 1 2 3 4 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Turn the 4395A OFF To gain access to the adjustment components remove the bottom cover of the 4395A Turn the 4395A ON Press System SERVICE TESTS ADJUSTMENT TESTS to display the internal adjustment tests menu Press 6 0 or use f D to select the the internal adjustment test 60 A9 A ON ADJ Press EXECUTE TEST to run the test Adjust ADJ A ON
203. ith each instrument depends on the country of destination Refer to Figure B 1 for the part numbers of the power cables available Warning For protection from electrical shock the power cable ground must not be defeated The power plug must plugged into an outlet that provides protective earth ground connection B 2 Power Requirement OPTION 900 United Kingdom Plug BS 1363A 250V Cable 8120 1351 OPTION 902 European Continent Earth Neutral Plug CEE VII 250V Cable 8120 1689 OPTION 904 U S Canada OS Line2 Farth Line 1 Plug NEMA 6 15P 250V 15 Cable 8120 0698 OPTION 906 Switzerland Line Plug SEV 1011 1959 24507 Type 12 250V Cable 8120 2104 India Republic of S Africa a Ground earth N Neutral OPTION 917 Plug SABS 164 250V Cable 8120 4211 NOTE Each option number includes a family of cords and connectors of varoius materials and plug body configurations straight 90 etc OPTION 901 Australia New Zealand _ Neutral Line Plug NZSS 198 AS C112 250V Cable 8120 1369 OPTION 903 U S Canada gt 7 Earth Neutral Line Plug NEMA 5 15P 125V 15A Cable 8120 1378 OPTION 905 Any country Neutral Plug CEE 22 VI 250V Cable 8123 1396 OPTION 912 Denmark Neutral Plug DHCR 107 220V Cable 8120 2956 OPTION 918 Neutral Plug JIS C 8303 125V 15A Cable 8120 4753 Plug o
204. itialize the 4395A c Initialize the multimeter Then set the controls as follows Controls Settings Measurement Function DC Volts Mode Display Reading Value V Reading Value Measurement Range Auto Range NPLC 100 d Set the 4395A and the multimeter to the first column of Table 2 8 Table 2 8 DC Bias Level Test Settings 4395A 4395A Multimeter Range DC Level DC Current Limit Auto Range 40 V 100 mA 100 V 10 V 100 mA 10 V 4 V 100 mA 10 V 0 100 mA 1V 4V 100 mA 10 V 10 V 100 mA 10 V 40 V 100 mA 100 V e Wait for the multimeter reading to settle Then record the reading in the calculation sheet Multimeter Reading column f Change the setting of the 4395A and the multimeter in accordance with Table 2 8 and repeat step l e for each setting g Calculate test results using the equation given in the calculation sheet Record the test results in the performance test record 2 DC Bias Current Level Test a Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2 8 Performance Tests 2 19 Multimeter Banana 00000000 N m BNC f Adapter BNC m BNC m Cable 61 cm CCS02037 Figure 2 8 DC Bias Current Level Test Setup b Initialize the multimeter Then set the controls as follo
205. itude Ratio Phase Dynamic tt tt Accuracy Test 12 agnitude Ratio Phase TT 11 Frequency Response Test 13 Displayed Average Noise Level tt Test 14 Amplitude Fidelity Test tt 15 nput Attenuator Switching t Uncertainty Test 16 oise Sidebands Test ttt 17 Amplitude Accuracy Frequency tt Response Test 18 Second Harmonic Distortion Test tt 19 Third Order Intermodulation tt tt Distortion Test 20 Other Spurious Test tt tt 21 Residual Response Test ttt tt tt ttf Most suspicious assembly and should be replaced tt Suspicious assembly and should be checked T There is some possibility of a fault 6 10 Troubleshooting Power Supply Troubleshooting INTRODUCTION Use this procedure only if you have read Troubleshooting and you believe the problem is in the power supply The procedure is designed to let you identify the bad assembly within the power supply functional group in the shortest possible time The power supply functional group consists of m A40 Pre Regulator m 50 DC DC Converter assemblies however are related to the power supply functional group because power is supplied to each assembly Figure 7 1 shows all power lines in simplified block diagram form If an assembly is replaced see Post Repair Procedures in the Post Repair Procedures chapter in this manual It tells what additional tests or adjustments need to be done after replacing any assembly Power Supply Troubleshoot
206. ked using the external test 51 DSK DR FALUT ISOL N a Press PREsET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 5 1 x1 EXECUTE TEST to run the external test 51 b the analyzer instructs insert a flexible disk into FDD Use a formatted but blank flexible disk otherwise the data on the disk will be overwritten by this test Then press CONT c Check the test result PASS or FAIL that is displayed at the end of the test m If this test fails replace the A53 FDD 7 Check the A32 I BASIC Interface and the mini DIN Keyboard The mini DIN external keyboard is connected to the A32 I BASIC I O connector and is used to develop programs If the external keyboard of the I Basic is not working perform the following procedure to verify the keyboard Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 1 1 EXECUTE TEST to run the internal test 1 CPU m If the internal test 1 passes the Agilent driver circuit on the CPU is probably working Inspect cables between the external keyboard and the A1 CPU through the A32 I BASIC interface If the cable is good replace the external keyboard m If the internal test 1 fails replace the A1 CPU 8 10 Digital Control Troubleshooting 8 Check the A33 EXT Interface The A33 EXT I O interface is used to control the external instrument like the printer scanner handler If the external instrument is not working perform the following procedure to verify the EXT I O inte
207. le for the current analyzer type Please confirm GPIB command or change analyzer type before sending the command 17 BACKUP DATA LOST Data checksum error on the battery backup memory has occurred The battery is recharged for approximately 10 minutes after power was turned ON Messages 1 Error Messages in Alphabetical Order 160 Block data error This error as well as errors 161 and 168 are generated when analyzing the syntax of a block data element This particular error message is used if the analyzer cannot detect a more specific error 168 Block data not allowed legal block data element was encountered but was not allowed by the analyzer at this point in parsing 13 CALIBRATION ABORTED The calibration in progress was terminated due to a change of the active channel or stimulus parameters 11 CALIBRATION REQUIRED No valid calibration coefficients were found when you attempted to turn calibration ON 126 CANT CHANGE NUMBER OF POINTS The number of points of the spectrum analyzer mode cannot be to change manually except in zero span 133 CANT CHANGE ON LIST SWEEP When list sweep is selected the following parameters are not allowed to be changed CENTER SPAN START STOP NOP IFBW or RBW POWER DC SOURCE Modify the list table to change these parameters in the list sweep 97 CANT CHANGE WHILE DATA MATH ON The setting cannot be changed when the data math function is used 99 CANT CHANGE WH
208. le from the 9 2 and turn the analyzer power on The location of the A9J2 is shown in the Figure 7 5 m If the A50 SHUTDOWN LED goes off the A9 is faulty Replace the A9 assembly Power Supply Troubleshooting 7 7 4395A Bottom View Rear nnman Li MM 5 8 5 0 9 Front CCS07022 Figure 7 5 A1 CPU Connector Locations 7 8 Power Supply Troubleshooting FIND OUT WHY THE A1 5 VD LED IS NOT ON STEADILY If the 5 VD LED is not on steadily the 5 VD line voltage is missing or is not enough to power the analyzer The problem may be in the A40 pre regulator the A50 DC DC Converter the Al CPU and any of assemblies obtaining the power from 5 VD supply 1 Check the A40 Pre Regulator a Turn the analyzer power off b Disconnect a cable form the A50J1 The 501 location is shown in Figure 7 6 c Turn the analyzer power on d Check the voltage between the pin 1 and pin 6 GND of the cable within 22 0 to 27 0 V using voltmeter with small probe m If the voltmeter reading is out of the limits replace the A40 pre regulator m If the voltmeter reading is within the limits the A40 pre regulator is verified Turn the analyzer power off and reconnec
209. lent Technologies uses a two part nine character serial number that is stamped on the serial number plate see Figure A 13 attached to the rear panel The first four digits and the letter are the serial prefix and the last five digits are the suffix SER NO AK Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd JP1KG12345 MADE IN JAPAN 33 Figure A 13 Serial Number Plate Manual Changes A 17 Power Requirement NReplacing Fuse Fuse Selection Select proper fuse according to the Table A 10 Table B 1 Fuse Selection Fuse Rating Type Fuse Part Number 5A 250Vac UL CSA type 2110 1303 Time Delay For ordering the fuse contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office Open the cover of AC line receptacle on To check or replace the fuse pull the fuse the rear panel using a small minus holder and remove the fuse To reinstall screwdriver the fuse insert a fuse with the proper rating into the fuse holder Power Requirement B 1 Power Requirements The 4395A requires the following power source Voltage 90 to 132 Vac 198 to 264 Vac Frequency 47 to 63 Hz Power 300 V maximum Power Cable In accordance with international safety standards this instrument is equipped with a three wire power cable When connected to an appropriate ac power outlet this cable grounds the instrument frame The type of power cable shipped w
210. leshooting organization Post Repair Procedures is the last chapter of the troubleshooting portion of the manual Post Repair Procedures is organized by assembly and notes what adjustment to perform and how to verify proper instrument operation following the replacement of an assembly Troubleshooting 6 1 Inspect Power on Seguence Inspect Rear Panel Feature Digital Control Internal Tests Failure Trouble shooting Replace the faulty assembly External shooting Performance shooting i Adjustments Performanc Tests Failure Trouble shooting CCS06009 Figure 6 1 Troubleshooting Organization 6 2 Troubleshooting START HERE This chapter contains following troublshooting procedures By performing them in the order listed below you can identify the faulty assembly or the faulty group efficiently 1 O w N Disconnect everything from the analyzer test set interconnect GPIB cable probe power and cables Perform the INSPECT THE POWER ON SEQUENCE in this chapter Perform the INSPECT THE REAR PANEL FEATURE in this chapter Perform the INTERNAL TESTS FAILURE TROUBLESHOOTING in this chapter Perform the EXTERNAL TESTS FAILURE TROUBLESHOOTING in this chapter Perform the performance tests in the Performance Test chapter and refer to PERFORMANCE TEST FAILURE TROUBLESHOOTING in this chapter
211. logies instrument product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of shipment except that in the case of certain components listed in General Information of this manual the warranty shall be for the specified period During the warranty period Agilent Technologies Company will at its option either repair or replace products that prove to be defective For warranty service or repair this product must be returned to a service facility designated by Agilent Technologies Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to Agilent Technologies and Agilent Technologies shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer However Buyer shall pay all shipping charges duties and taxes for products returned to Agilent Technologies from another country Agilent Technologies warrants that its software and firmware designated by Agilent Technologies for use with an instrument will execute its programming instruction when property installed on that instrument Agilent Technologies does not warrant that the operation of the instrument or software or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free Limitation Of Warranty The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer Buyer supplied software or interfacing unauthorized modification or misuse operation outside the environmental specifications for the product or improper site preparation or mai
212. ls are available for the analyzer Operation Manual Agilent Part Number 04395 90020 The Operation Manual describes all function accessed from the front panel keys and softkeys It also provides information on options and accessories available specifications system performance and some topics about the analyzer s features Programming Manual Agilent Part Number 04395 90021 The Programming Manual shows how to write and use BASIC program to control the analyzer and describes how HP Instrument BASIC works with the analyzer HP Instrument BASIC Users Handbook Agilent Part Number E2083 90005 The HP Instrument BASIC User s Handbook introduces you to the HP Instrument BASIC programming language provide some helpful hints on getting the most use from it and provide a general programming reference It is divided into three books HP Instrument BASIC Programming Techniques HP Instrument BASIC Interface Techniques and HP Instrument BASIC Language Reference Service Manual Option 0BW only Agilent Part Number 04395 90120 The Service Manual explains how to adjust troubleshoot and repair the instrument This manual is option OBW only 1 General Information INTRODUCTION ORGANIZATION SERVICE MANUAL PERFORMANCE TESTS CALIBRATION CYCLE CALCULATION SHEET AND PERFORMANCE TEST RECORD Calculation Sheet Performance Test Record How to Use RECOMMENDED TEST EQUIPMENT Calibration Data Requ
213. lue a On the 4395A set the controls as follows Control Settings Key Strokes RBW 100 Hz Bu Avg RES BW O O Video BW 1 Hz Ew Avg VIDEO BW 1 Ga Frequency Span 2 5 kHz Span 2 C 6 b Perform the following steps to measure the noise sideband level at 1 kHz offset from the carrier i Press Trigger SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep li Press Search Marker AMODE MENU AMKR to place the delta marker reference at the peak of the carrier ii Press 1 to move the delta marker to an offset of 1 kHz from the carrier iv Record the delta marker reading in the performance test record v Press 1 to move the delta marker to an offset of 1 kHz from the carrier vi Record the delta marker reading in the performance test record c On the 4395A set the controls as follows Control Settings Key Strokes RBW 1 kHz Bw Avg RES BW 1 Video BW 3 Hz Ew Avg VIDEO BW G Ga Frequency Span 25 kHz Span 2 6 k m d Perform the following steps to measure the noise sideband level at 10 kHz offset from the carrier i Press Trigger SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep li Press Search MAX Marker AMODE MENU AMKR to place the delta marker reference at the peak of the carrier Performance Tests 2 63 iii Press 1 k m to move the delta mark
214. mance test record Test Result column Remove the test port cable from the 4395A A input and connect it to the B input On the network analyzer press MENU TRIGGER MENU SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep On the network analyzer press MKR FCTN MKR SEARCH OFF MAX to move the marker to the maximum point on the trace Record the network analyzer s marker reading with an opposite sign in the performance test record Test Result column 2 30 Performance Tests 10 ABSOLUTE AMPLITUDE ACCURACY TEST NA Description This test measures a test signal amplitude using the 4395A absolute amplitude measurement function in the network analyzer mode and using a power meter a power sensor and a multimeter Then it compares the 4395A reading with the reading of the power meter or the multimeter The accuracy of the absolute amplitude measurement is verified over the entire frequency range In this test the 4395A RF OUT signal is used as the test signal The RF OUT signal is divided through a two way power splitter and applied to an 4395A input and the power sensor input or the multimeter Specification Absolute amplitude accuracy R A B 10 dBm input input att 10 dB 23 5 freq gt 100 Hz IFBW lt kHz 1 5 dB Test Equipment Power Meter 436A Opt 022 437B or 438A Powe
215. me Assembly Parts FDD Assembly 3 23 Table A 7 Main Frame Assembly Parts FDD Assembly 3 23 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 04896 01275 4 3 ANGLE 28480 04396 01275 2 04396 25004 T 1 SPONGE 28480 04396 25004 3 0950 3208 1 1 FDD 3 5 2MODE 28480 0950 3208 4 04396 61651 6 1 FLAT CBL ASSY 28480 04396 61651 5 04396 61672 1 1 WIRE ASSY 28480 04896 61672 6 0515 0914 8 31 SCR MACH M3X0 5 28480 0515 0914 Note When the old FDD assembly 0955 3208 is faulty replace both the FDD and the angle with new ones Li Manual Changes 7 Change the Replaceable Parts as following CDS11047 Figure A 6 Front Assembly Parts 5 8 Table A 8 Front Assembly Parts 5 8 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 4970 66539 2 1 LCD MINI BD 28480 E4970 66539 2 0515 1550 0 4 SCR M3 L 8 28480 0515 1550 A 8 Manual Changes 4 Change the Replaceable Parts as following CCS06036 Figure A 7 Rear Assembly Parts 7 8 Table A 9 Rear Assembly Parts 7 8 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 1252 6951 8 1 ACINLET 28480 1252 6951 1 2110 0030 3 1 FUSE 5A 250V 28480 2110 0030 1 2110 1134 0 1 FUSE DRAWER 28480 2110 1134 2 6960 0027 3 1 PLUG HOLE 28480 6960 0027 3 1252 4690 8 1 DUST COVER 284
216. nal test result Use the calculation sheet in this chapter as an aid for recording raw measurement data and calculating the performance test results Calculation sheet entries are provided only for performance tests in which calculations are required to obtain the test results 2 SOURCE LEVEL ACCURACY FLATNESS TEST Level Accuracy Frequency Power Meter Reading 50 MHz 2 dBm 1 is the power meter reading of the source level accuracy test Calculation Sheet 3 1 Level Flatness 3 2 Calculation Sheet Frequency Power Meter Reading 5 10 Hz 50 Hz 00 Hz 2 kHz 12 kHz 60 kHz 15 1 0 kHz MHz 3 MHz 10 45 T5 110 140 190 235 290 345 400 445 470 500 MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz a dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm Test Result a ref dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB 3 NON SWEEP POWER LINEARITY TEST Attenuation Calibration Value 10 dB al dB 20 dB 2 30 a3 JD 40 4 50 5 dB 1 Incremental attenuation referenced to dB setting Reference 0 dBm 4395A Power Meter Reading Reference Source Power b ref 0 dBm dBm b a3 dBm Non Sweep Power Linearity 4395A Power Meter Reading Test Result Source Power b 15 dBm dBm b a5 ref 15 dB 10 dBm
217. nce group the tested performance belongs to NA indicates the performance test belongs to the network analyzer mode performance group SA indicates the performance test belongs to the spectrum analyzer mode performance group Each procedure consists of the following parts Description describes the test procedure Specification describes the performance verified in the test Test Equipment describes test equipment required in the test Procedure describes the test procedure step by step Note Allow the analyzer to warm up for at least 30 minutes before you execute any of the performance tests 3 Perform all performance tests in an ambient temperature of 23 5 C Note Before performing any tests make extra copies of the calculation sheet in Chapter 3 and the performance test record in Chapter 4 These required 3 in the test procedure For an explanation of how to use these records see the CALCULATION SHEET AND PERFORMANCE TEST RECORD in Chapter 1 Performance Tests 2 1 1 FREQUENCY ACCURACY TEST Description This test uses a frequency counter and a frequency standard to measure the actual frequency of the 4395A RF OUT signal when it is tuned to 100 MHz This test checks the frequency accuracy of the internal frequency reference or the high stability frequency reference for Option 1D5 Specification Frequency reference accuracy 023 5 C referenced to 23 C
218. ncertainty 0 8 dB 0 8 dB 0 112 dB Performance Test Record 4 19 Frequency Response Frequency Minimum Limit Test Result Test Limit Measurement Uncertainty 10 Hz 3 0 dB 3 0 dB 0 264 dB 15 Hz 3 0 dB 3 0 dB 10 264 dB 25 Hz 3 0 dB 3 0 dB 10 264 dB 40 Hz 3 0 dB 3 0 dB 10 264 dB 80 Hz 3 0 dB 3 0 dB 10 264 dB 100 Hz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 10 264 dB 200 Hz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 10 264 dB 500 Hz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 10 264 dB 1 kHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 10 264 dB 2 kHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 10 264 dB 5 kHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 10 264 dB 10 kHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 10 264 dB 20 kHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 10 264 dB 50 kHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 10 264 dB 100 kHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 10 264 dB 200 kHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 10 264 dB 500 kHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 10 264 dB 1 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 077 dB 2 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 077 dB 5 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 077 dB 8 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 081 dB 10 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 081 dB 20 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 081 dB 4 20 Performance Test Record Frequency Minimum Limit Test Result Test Limit Measurement Uncertainty 100 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 093 dB 125 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 093 dB 150 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 093 dB 175 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 200 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 225 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 250 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 275 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 300 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 325 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 350 MHz 1 3 dB 1 3 dB 0 110 dB 375 MHz 1 3
219. ng If the fan is not rotating see the FIND OUT WHY THE FAN IS NOT ROTATING If the fan is rotating and the A50 SHUTDOWN LED is off the problem may be in the A50 DC DC Converter and any of assemblies obtaining the power from 5 VD supply and the higher power supplies 1 Disconnect the Cable from the A1J10 Turn the analyzer power off Disconnect the cable from A1J10 Turn the analyzer power on m If the A50 SHUTDOWN LED goes on replace the Al CPU m If the A50 SHUTDOWN LED is still off the A1 CPU is verified Turn the analyzer power off and reconnect the cable to the A1J10 Continue with the next Remove Assemblies 2 Remove Assemblies a Turn the analyzer power off b Remove the assemblies A2 A5 A7 A8 and 51 c Turn the analyzer power on m If the A50 SHUTDOWN LED is still off inspect the A20 motherboard for soldering bridges and shorted traces on the FAN POWER and the FAN LOCK signal paths m If the A50 SHUTDOWN LED goes on the A20 motherboard are verified Continue with the next step d Reinstall each assembly one at a time Turn the analyzer power on after each is installed The assembly that causes the A50 SHUTDOWN LED to go off is the most probable faulty assembly Replace the assembly If no assembly makes the A50 SHUTDOWN LED off continue with the next Disconnect the Cable from the A9J2 3 Disconnect the Cable from the A9J2 Turn the analyzer power off and reinstall all of assemblies Disconnect the cab
220. nside or outside the instrument disconnection of the protective ground terminal can make the instrument dangerous Intentional interruption of the protective ground system for any reason is prohibited Remember that the capacitors in the analyzer can remain charged for several minutes even through you have turned the analyzer OFF and unplugged it Warning The adjustments described in this chapter are performed with power applied and the protective covers removed Dangerous voltage levels exist at many points and can result serious personal injury or death if you come into contact with them Adjustments 5 1 Required Controller Performing adjustments requires the following controller Windows NT PC Personal Computer Microprocessor Minimum 80486 33 MHz or faster RAM Minimum 24 MB Mass Strage 3 5 inch 1 44 MB floppy disk drive and a hard disk drive with at least 30 MB of free disk space Display Ultra VGA 1024 by 768 System GPIB Card 82340 or 82341 OS Microsoft Windows NT version 3 51 or later and HP VEE for Windows version 3 2 Software Requirements The adjustments require the 4395A Adjustment Program Agilent part number for the 4395A Adjustment Program for HP VEE Windows is 04395 18004 5 2 Adjustments Required Test Equipment Required equipment for performing the adjustments is listed in Table 5 1 Use only calibrated test equipment when adjusting the 439
221. nsitivity power sensor to measure the actual power of the 4395A RF OUT signal at several power settings and then calculates the power linearity The power linearity is referenced to a power level of 0 dBm In this test the input power to the power sensor is maintained between 60 dBm and 30 dBm using the step attenuator This reduces measurement uncertainty caused by the power sensor s non linearity and noise The actual power of the RF OUT signal is calculated by adding the attenuation used and the power meter reading Therefore this test requires the calibrated attenuation values of the step attenuator at 50 MHz Specification Level linearity 1 Output Power Linearity 40 dBm power 1 0 dB power 40 dBm 1 5 dB 1 235 C relative to 0 dBm output Test Equipment Power Meter 436A Opt 022 437B or 438A Power Sensor 8481D Type N Cable 61 cm 11500B or part of 11851B Step Attenuator 10 dB Step VSWR lt 1 02 8496G Opt 001 and H60 Attenuator driver 11713A 1 Calibration values for attenuation settings of 10 dB to 50 dB at 50 MHz are required Procedure 1 Record the step attenuator 50 MHz calibration values in the calculation sheet Calibration Value c
222. nt Assembly Parts 4 7 Front Assembly Parts 5 7 Front Assembly Parts 6 7 Main Frame Assembly Parts FDD Assembly 3 23 Front Assembly Parts 5 8 oos Rear Assembly Parts 7 8 Front Assembly Parts 3 8 Front Assembly Parts 4 8 Top View Major Assemblies Main Frame Assembly Parts A5 and AT Assemblies 18 23 Main Frame Assembly Parts YTO Assembly 20 23 Serial Number Plate Power Cable Supplied Contents 12 Main Frame Assembly Parts A50 DC DC Converter Assembly 17 23 10 31 10 32 10 33 10 34 10 35 10 36 10 37 10 38 10 39 10 40 10 41 10 42 10 43 10 44 10 45 10 46 10 47 10 48 10 49 10 50 3 4 5 6 A 7 A 8 A 9 11 12 13 15 16 17 3 Tables 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 T 2 8 2 9 2 10 2 11 2 12 2 13 2 14 2 15 2 16 2 17 2 18 2 19 2 20 2 21 2 22 2 23 2 24 2 25 5 1 5 2 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 7 1 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 Performance Tests Recommended Test Equipment SE Calibration Data Required for 8496G Opt 001 and H60 Source Level Flatness Test Settings 1 Source Level Flatness Test Settings 2 Non Sweep Power Linearity Test Settings Power Sweep Linearity Test Settings Power Sweep Linearity Test Settings 2 Harmonics Test Settings Non Harmonics Test Settings DC Bias Level Test Settings DC Bias Current Level Test Settings
223. ntenance No other warranty is expressed or implied Agilent Technologies specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose vi Exclusive Remedies The remedies provided herein are buyer s sole and exclusive remedies Agilent Technologies shall not be liable for any direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages whether based on contract tort or any other legal theory Assistance Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Agilent Technologies products For any assistance contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office Addresses are provided at the back of this manual vii Typeface Conventions Bold Italics Computer HARDKEYS SOFTKEYS viii Boldface type is used when a term is defined For example icons are symbols Italic type is used for emphasis and for titles of manuals and other publications Italic type is also used for keyboard entries when a name or a variable must be typed in place of the words in italics For example copy filename means to type the word copy to type a space and then to type the name of a file such as filet Computer font is used for on screen prompts and messages Labeled keys on the instrument front panel are enclosed in Softkeys located to the right of the CRT are enclosed in Documentation The following manua
224. nts m Record the larger value in the performance test record Test Result column for A R phase B R Magnitude Ratio Phase Frequency Response Test m Connect the test equipment as shown in setup 1 of Figure 2 19 Performance Tests 2 47 00000000 00000000 N m N m Adapter N m N m Adapter Power Splitter Power Splitter N m N m Cable N m N m Cable SETUP 1 SETUP 2 CCS02017 Figure 2 19 B R Magnitude Ratio Phase Frequency Response Test Setup m Set the 4395A controls as follows Control Settings Key Strokes Active Channel CH 1 ch 1 Input Port B R Meas B R Format LOG MAG Format LOG MAG Active Channel CH 2 ch 2 Input Port B R Meas B R Format PHASE Format PHASE Start Frequency 1 MHz Start 1 Stop Frequency 500 MHz stop 5 9 9 Number of Points 500 Sweep NUMBER of POINTS 5 0 0 x1 m Press Trigger SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep m Set the 4395A controls as follows Control Settings Key Strokes Active Channel CH 1 ch 1 Data Memory Display DATA MEMORY Active Channel CH 2 ch 2 Data Memory Display DATA MEMORY m Reverse the cable connections of the 4395A A and R inputs as shown in setup 2 of Figure 2 18
225. nts 5 21 9 Receiver Gain Adjustment The purpose of this procedure is to adjust the total gain of the receiver Note HP VEE Adjustment Program is not required in this adjustment Follow the procedures below and adjust proper item using the internal adjustment test Li Required Equipment Signal Generator 8642 8644 8663A Power Meter 436A Opt 022 437B or 438A Power Sensor 2 era e a en 8482A Two Way Power Splitter 11667A Type N Cable 61 cm 11500B or part of 11851B N m N m adapter PN 1250 1475 Procedure 1 Turn che 4395A OFF 2 To gain access to the adjustment components remove the top cover of the 4395A 3 Turn the 4395A ON 4 Press System SERVICE TESTS ADJUSTMENT TESTS to display the internal adjustment tests menu 5 Press 6 7 or use f I to select the internal adjustment test 67 A7 GAIN ADJ 6 Press EXECUTE TEST to run the test 7 Connect the test equipment as shown in the Figure 5 12 5 22 Adjustments Signal Generator BNC m BNC m Cable 122 cm Power Meter 00000000
226. nual 64 MANY SEGMENTS The maximum number of segments for the limit line table is 18 74 CURRENT EDITING SEGMENT SCRATCHED The current editing segment for the list table and the limit line is scratched when the following cases occur GPIB on y m When EDITLIST edit list table command is received while editing a segment for the list table m When EDITLIML edit limit line command is received while editing a segment for the limit line Send LIMSDON limit segment done or SDON segment done to terminate editing segment 15 COMMAND IGNORED SEGMENT NOT DONE YET The GPIB command the analyzer received is ignored because the segment is editing GPIB only Send LIMSDON limit segment done or SDON segment done to terminate editing segment See Programming Manual 76 SEGMENT START STOP OVERLAPPED Segments are not allowed to be overlapped Reenter appropriate value for start or stop value of segments to avoid that segment is not overlapped Messages 18 Error Messages in Numerical Order 77 MANY SEGMENTS OR POINTS Frequency list mode is limited to 31 segments or 801 points 18 SMALL POINTS OR TOO LARGE STOP 5TOP SPAN NOP 1 is out of sweep range Increase NOP or change STOP value to lower frequency to avoid this error 82 CANT CHANGE ANOTHER CONTROLLER ON BUS The analyzer cannot assume the mode of system controller until the active controller is removed from the bus or relinquishes the bu
227. olumn 2 Connect the power sensor to the power meter and calibrate the power meter for the power sensor 3 Set the step attenuator to 30 dB before connecting the test equipment This protects the power sensor from excess input 4 Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2 4 2 8 Performance Tests Power Meter 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 00000000 00 e 00 O Cable Power Sensor D Step Attenuator VSWR lt 1 02 502004 Figure 2 4 Non sweep Power Linearity Test Setup 5 Press Meas ANALYZER NETWORK ANALYZER to initialize the 4395A Then set the controls as follows Control Settings Key Strokes Center Frequency 50 MHz Center 5 0 Frequency Span 0 Hz Span ZERO SPAN The source power now is set to 0 dBm preset value 6 Set the step attenuator to the first setting 30 dB listed in the second column of Table 2 3 7 Wait for the power meter reading to settle 8 Record the power meter reading in the calculation sheet Use Power Meter Reading column of the calculation sheet for the reference 0 dBm Table 2 3 Non Sweep Power Linearity Test Settings 4395A Step Attenuator Source Power 0 dBm 30 dB 15 dBm 50 dB 10 dBm 40 dB 10 dBm 20 dB 20 dBm 10
228. on Fifth Edition Part Number 04395 90100 Part Number 04395 90110 Part Number 04395 90110 Part Number 04395 90110 Part Number 04395 90120 Safety Summary The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation service and repair of this instrument Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific WARNINGS elsewhere in this manual may impair the protection provided by the equipment n addition it violates safety standards of design manufacture and intended use of the instrument The Agilent Technologies Company assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements Note 4395A comply with INSTALLATION CATEGORY II and POLLUTION DEGREE 2 in 1010 1 4395A are INDOOR USE product w Note LEDs in 4395A are Class 1 in accordance with 825 1 CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT Ground The Instrument To avoid electric shock hazard the instrument chassis and cabinet must be connected to a safety earth ground by the supplied power cable with earth blade DO NOT Operate In An Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable gasses or fumes Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a definite safety hazard Keep Away From Live Circuits Operating personnel must not remove instrument covers Component replacement and internal adjustments must be made by qualified
229. on Sheet 3 15 15 INPUT ATTENUATOR SWITCHING UNCERTAINTY TEST Step Attenuator Calibration Value at 50 MHz Attenuation Calibration Value 10 dB al dB 20 dB a2 dB 30 dB 40 dB a4 dB 50 dB 5 1 Incremental attenuation referenced to dB setting Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty Input R 4395A 4395A Reading Test Result Input Attenuation b 0 dB dB b a4 a5 20 dB dB b a4 a3 30 1 dB 4 2 40 dB dB b a4 al 50 b a4 Input 4395 4395A Reading Test Result Input Attenuation b 0 dB dB b a4 a5 20 dB dB b a4 a3 30 1 dB 4 2 40 dB dB b a4 al 50 b a4 3 16 Calculation Sheet Input B 4395A 4395A Reading Test Result Input Attenuation b 0 dB dB b a4 a5 20 dB dB b a4 a3 30 dB b a4 a2 40 dB dB 4 1 50 dB b a4 Calculation Sheet 3 17 17 AMPLITUDE ACCURACY FREQUENCY RESPONSE TEST Note Calculate ref first in the table for the reference at 50 MHz Then calculate test results using the equation and the value of ref Input Reference at 50 MHz 4395A 4395A Power Meter 4395A Power Meter Test Result Frequency Reading 1 Reading 1 Reading 2 Reading 2 ref r1 r2 r3 r4 r1 r2 r3 r4 2 50 MHz dBm dBm dBm dBm dB 3 18 Calculation Sheet At Frequencies gt 1 MHz 4395A Frequency 1 MHz 2 MHz 5 MHz 8 MHz 10 20 MHz 100
230. ondition of the analyzer front panel connectors the calibration kit devices and the test set connectors 1 Inspect the front panel connectors on the analyzer Check for bent or broken center pins and loose connector bulkheads Gage the connectors Gage kit is Agilent part number 85054 80011 The specified front panel type N connector center pin protrusion is 0 201 to 0 207 inch If the center pin protrusion is incorrect replace the entire connector assembly or A9 input multiplexer See the Replaceable Parts chapter Inspect the calibration kit devices for bent or broken center conductors and other physical damage Gage each device The mechanical specifications for each device are given in the calibration kit manual If any calibration device is out of mechanical tolerance replace the device Inspect and the gage test set and the power splitter connectors as described in steps 1 and 2 Accessories Troubleshooting 9 3 INSPECT THE ACCESSORIES Measurement problems can be caused by faulty accessories or faulty devices between the accessories and the analyzer For example the RF cables the probe power connector the TEST SET I O INTERCONNECT connector and the interconnect cable can cause problems Some recommended accessories used with the analyzer are listed below Test Sets for example the 85046A B 5 Parameter Test Set Active Probes for example the 41800A Active Probe Preamplifier for example the 19
231. ons Recommended Model Qty Agilent Part Number Frequency Counter Frequency Range 500 MHz Time Base Error 5334B 1 lt 1 9 10 7 year Frequency Standard 2 Frequency 10 MHz Time Base Error lt 5061B 1 1x1071 year Spectrum Analyzer Frequency Range 100 Hz to 1 5 GHz 8566A B 1 Network Analyzer Frequency Range 300 kHz to 500 MHz 8753 1 Power Meter No substitute 436A Opt 022 437B or 1 438A Power Sensor Frequency Range 1 MHz to 500 MHz Power 8482A 1 26 dBm to 0 dBm Power Sensor Frequency Range 1 MHz to 500 MHz Power 8481D 1 60 dBm to 35 dBm Function Genarator Frequency Range 10 Hz to 500 kHz Level 3325A 1 Accuracy 0 2 dB Return loss gt 20 dB Multimeter No substitute 3458A 1 Signal Generator Frequency Range 1 MHz to 500 MHz SSB 8663A 1 Phase Noise at 100 Hz offset lt 112 dBc Hz SSB Phase Noise at 1 kHz offset lt 121 dBc Hz Signal Generator Frequency Range 50 MHz to 100 2 MHz SSB 8642B 1 Phase Noise at 100 Hz offset lt 112 dBc Hz SSB Phase Noise at 1 kHz offset lt 121 dBc Hz Step Attenuator Attenuation Range 0 dB to 100 dB Step 10 8496G Opt 001 and H60 1 dB VSWR lt 1 02 Attenuator Switch No substitute 11713A 1 Driver 500 Calibration No substitute 85032B 1 Kit T R Test Sets Frequency Range 300 kHz to 500 MHz 85044A 1 Directivity gt 40 dB 50 MHz Low Pass Filter Rejection at 75 MHz 60 dB PN 0955 0306 1 50 Q Feedth
232. ontrol Settings Key Strokes Center Frequency 50 MHz Center 5 0 Frequency Span 0 Hz Span ZERO SPAN The source power now is set to 0 dBm preset value 4 Source Level Accuracy Test a Wait for the power meter reading to settle b Record the power meter reading in the performance test record Test Result column for the level accuracy test 5 Source Level Flatness Test High Frequencies a Record the test result of the level accuracy test in the calculation sheet Power Meter Reading ref column for the level flatness test b Press Center 1 to change the 4395A center frequency to the first flatness test frequency 1 MHz listed in Table 2 1 Table 2 1 lists flatness test points for high frequencies Performance Tests 2 5 Table 2 1 Source Level Flatness Test Settings 1 4395A Center Frequency 1 MHz 3 MHz 10 MHz 45 MHz 75 MHz 110 MHz 140 MHz 190 MHz 235 MHz 290 MHz 345 MHz 400 MHz 445 MHz 470 MHz 500 MHz c Wait for the power meter reading to settle Then record the reading in the calculation sheet Power Meter Reading column d Change the 4395A center frequency in accordance with Table 2 1 and repeat step 5 c for each frequency e Calculate test results using the equation given in the calculation sheet Record the test results in the performance test record 6 Source Level Flatness Test Low Frequencies a Connect the test equipment as shown
233. ord 16 NOISE SIDEBANDS TEST Input R Frequency Offset Test Result Test Limit Measurement from Carrier Uncertainty 10 MHz kHz lt 97 dBc Hz 2 14 dB 1 kHz lt 97 dBc Hz 2 14 dB 10 kHz lt 97 dBc Hz 0 98 dB 10 kHz lt 97 dBc Hz 0 98 dB 100 kHz lt 110 dBc Hz 2 14 dB 100 kHz lt 110 dBc Hz 2 14 dB 1 MHz lt 110 dBc Hz 0 98 dB 1 MHz lt 110 dBc Hz 0 98 dB 100 MHz kHz lt 97 dBc Hz 2 14 dB 1 kHz lt 97 dBc Hz 2 14 dB 10 kHz lt 97 dBc Hz 0 98 dB 10 kHz lt 97 dBc Hz 0 98 dB 100 kHz lt 110 dBc Hz 2 14 dB 100 kHz lt 110 dBc Hz 2 14 dB 1 MHz lt 110 dBc Hz 0 98 dB 1 MHz lt 110 dBc Hz 0 98 dB 500 MHz kHz lt 97 dBc Hz 2 14 dB 1 kHz lt 97 dBc Hz 2 14 dB 10 kHz lt 97 dBc Hz 0 98 dB 10 kHz lt 97 dBc Hz 0 98 dB 100 kHz lt 110 dBc Hz 2 14 dB 100 kHz lt 110 dBc Hz 2 14 dB 1 MHz lt 110 dBc Hz 0 98 dB 1 MHz lt 110 dBc Hz 0 98 dB Performance Test Record 4 17 17 AMPLITUDE ACCURACY FREQUENCY RESPONSE TEST Input R Level Accuracy Minimum Limit Test Result Maximum Limit Measurement Uncertainty 0 8 dB 0 8 dB 0 112 dB Frequency Response Frequency Minimum Limit Test Result Test Limit Measurement Uncertainty 10 Hz 3 0 dB 3 0 dB 0 264 dB 15 Hz 3 0 dB 3 0 dB 0 264 dB 25 Hz 3 0 dB 3 0 dB 0 264 dB 40 Hz
234. ory are tested on the sequence to access the bootloader menu Perform the following procedure to verify the A1 DRAM and flash memory a Turn the analyzer power off b Push two keys Start and Preset With keeping the two keys pushed down turn the analyzer power on c Wait for the display shown in Figure 8 6 appears on the LCD d Check no error message displayed on the LCD m If no error message is displayed the DRAM and flash memories are verified Continue with the next Check the A1 Volatile Memory m If an error message is displayed or the display shown in Figure 8 6 does not appear the CPU is probably faulty Replace the A1 CPU 8 8 Digital Control Troubleshooting 4395A 10Hz 500MHz 10Hz 500MHz 100kHz 500MHz NETWORK SPECTRUM IMPEDANCE ANALYZER SYSTEM c Copyright 1992 1997 2000 UPDATE Agilent Technologies Inc SYSTEM All Rights Reserved BACKUP BootLoader REV N NN MMM DD YYYY Current Firmwave Revision 4395A REV N NN MMM DD YYYY PREVIEW DISK Select Softkey REBOOT If the test fails the error message is displayed instead of Select Softkey CCS08015 Figure 8 6 Bootloader Display Check the A1 Volatile Memory Turn the analyzer power on Press System SERVICE MENU TESTS 2 1 EXECUTE TEST to run the internal test 2 VOLATILE MEMORY
235. ote HP VEE Adjustment Program is not required in this adjustment Follow the procedures below and adjust proper item manually Li Required Equipment Frequency Counter e n 5334B BNC cable 61 em PN 8120 1839 Procedure 1 Turn the 4395A OFF 2 To gain access to the adjustment components remove the top cover of the 4395A 3 Remove the BNC BNC adapter from 10 MHz INT REF Output and REF OVEN connecters 4 Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 5 3 to monitor the 10 MHz reference clock 10MHz INT REF Output Frequency Counter 00000000 BNC m BNC m Cable 61 cm 505003 Figure 5 3 Frequency Reference Adjustment Setup 5 8 Adjustments 5 Turn the 4395A ON 6 Adjust A7 Freq Adj until the frequency counter reads 10 MHz 5 Hz A7 FREQ ADJ CCS05014 Figure 5 4 Frequency Reference Adjustment Location 7 Turn the 4395A OFF 8 Reconnect the BNC BNC adapter and install the top cover Adjustments 5 9 2 Oven Reference Adjustment Option 105 The purpose of this procedure is to adjust the 10 MHz
236. ption 905 is frequently interconnecting system peripherals used for components and Figure B 1 Power Cable Supplied Power Requirement B 3 Error Messages This section lists the error messages that are displayed on the analyzer display or transmitted by the instrument over GPIB Each error message is accompanied by an explanation and suggestions are provided to help in solving the problem Where applicable references are provided to the related chapter of the appropriate manual When displayed error messages are preceded with the word CAUTION That part of the error message has been omitted here for the sake or brevity Some messages without the CAUTION are for information only and do not indicate an error condition The messages are listed first in alphabetical order because the displayed messages do not contain the message number The messages are then listed in numerical order to make them easier to find if they are read over the GPIB In addition to error messages The analyzer s status is indicated by status notations in the left margin of the display Examples are Cor and Avg Sometimes these appear together with error messages Error Messages in Alphabetical Order A 10 ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED Error correction for the selected calibration class cannot be computed until all the necessary standards have been measured 84 ANALYZER TYPE MISMATCH The analyzer receives a command that is not availab
237. r 68041 To 5042 Pin4 GND 507021 Figure 7 9 A50 DC DC Converter Troubleshooting Setup a Turn the analyzer power off b Disconnect cables from the A50J3 The connector locations are shown in Figure 7 9 c Connect the pulse generator to the A50J2 as shown in Figure 7 9 The pulse generator is used to feed the substitute of the FAN LOCK signal to the A50 DC DC converter This purposes not to shut down the 50 DC DC converter d Turn the pulse generator power on Set the controls as follows Wave Form Square Frequency Approximately 30 Hz Amplitude 1 8 e Connect a resister appoximately 6800hms 125mW between the A50J2 pin 5 7 8 V and pin 4 GND as shown in Figure 7 9 f Turn the analyzer power on g Measure all power supply voltages on A50J2 and A50J3 using a voltmeter with a small probe See the Table 7 1 for power lines connector pins and limits Power Supply Troubleshooting 7 13 Table 7 1 A50 Power Supplies Supply Connector Pin GND Connector Pin Range 5 VD A50J3 Pin 1 2 and 3 5003 Pin 4 5 and 6 4 6 V to 45 7 V 18 V A50J2 Pin 1 A50J2 Pin and 4 14 0 V to 27 0 V 18 A50J2 Pin 2 A50J2 Pin and 4 14 0 V to 27 0 V 7 8 A50J2 Pin 5 A50J2 Pin 3 and 4 7 0 V to 9 0 V 7 8 5072 Pin 6 A50J2 Pin and4 6 0 V to 12 0 V 24 V A50J2 Pin 8 A50J2 Pin 10 22 0 V to 27 0 V m If any of the power supply
238. r Reading column e Change the measurement setting in accordance with Table 2 7 and repeat step 6 d for each frequency f Calculate test results using the equation given in the calculation sheet Performance Tests 2 17 6 DC BIAS TEST Option 001 Description This test uses a multimeter to measure thte actual DC dias voltage and currecnt levels of the 4395A Specification DC Bias Level Accuracy Voltage 23 5 5 0 1 4mV Ide m A x5 0 mV Current Q23459C X 0 596 304A Vdc V 10 kO mA 1 Current at DC source connector 2 Voltage at DC source connector Test Equipment Multimeter m e ra e ha e hare 3458A BNC cable 61 e hh mee he PN 8120 1839 N m BNC f adapter eene PN 1250 0780 BNC f Dual Banana Plug Adapter PN 1251 2277 Procedure 1 DC Bias Voltage Level Test a Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2 7 Multimeter Banana PI 20000000 BNC m BNC m Cable 61 cm CCS02011 Figure 2 7 DC Bias Voltage Level Test Setup 2 18 Performance Tests b Press Meas ANALYZER TYPE NETWORK ANALYZER Preset to in
239. r Sensor hh me emere ee he a ea 8482A Multimeter em sre e e e 3458A Two Way Power Splitter heh 11667A 500 Feedthrough HII PN 04192 61002 Type N Cable 61 cm 11500B or part of 11851B BNC cable 61 em hn PN 8120 1839 N m BNC f adapter PN 1250 0780 N m N m adapter PN 1250 1475 BNC f Dual Banana Plug Adapter PN 1251 2277 Procedure 1 For testing low frequencies a Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2 12 Performance Tests 2 31 Multimeter Banana 00000000 509 Feedthrough Adapter N m BNC f Adapter N m N m Cable D BNC m BNC m Cable 61 cm Power Splitter Direct Connection No Cable 502031 Figure 2 12 Absolute Amplitude Accuracy Test Setup 1 b Initialize the multimeter Then set the controls as follows Controls Settings Measurement Function AC
240. rd Test Result column Remove the test port cable from the 4395A R input and connect it to the A input On the network analyzer press MENU TRIGGER MENU SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep On the network analyzer press MKR FCTN MKR SEARCH OFF MAX to move the marker to the maximum point on the trace Record the network analyzer s marker reading with an opposite sign in the performance test record Test Result column Remove the test port cable from the 4395A A input and connect it to the B input On the network analyzer press MENU TRIGGER MENU SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep On the network analyzer press MKR FCTN SEARCH OFF MAX to move the marker to the maximum point on the trace Record the network analyzer s marker reading with an opposite sign in the performance test record Test Result column On the network analyzer perform the following steps to set the network analyzer controls to measure the return loss from 100 MHz to 500 MHz Press Preset to initialize the network analyzer Press Stat Q Press Ge WD Press Menu SWEEP TYPE MENU LOG FREQ Press Avg IF BW 1 0 1 f Press CAL CAL KIT 7mm 500 RETURN CALIBRATION MENU 511 1 PORT to initiate a calibration g Connect a type N f open to the end of the test port cable Pre
241. requency counter or when testing the 4395A equipped with Opt 1D5 BNC m BNC m Cable 122 cm Frequency Counter 00000000 N m BNC f Adapter BNC m BNC m Cable 61 cm CCS02036 Figure 2 1 Frequency Accuracy Test Setup 2 Initialize the frequency counter Then set the frequency standard is connected Controls Settings Gate Time 1 sec INT EXT Switch rear panel External When the frequency standard is connected 3 Press Meas ANALYZER TYPE NETWORK ANALYZER to initialize the 4395A Then set the controls as follows Control Settings Key Strokes Center Frequency 100 MHz Center 1 0 0 Frequency Span ZERO Span ZERO SPAN The source power now is set to 0 dBm preset value 4 Press Trigger SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the frequency counter reading to settle 5 Record the frequency counter reading to 1 Hz resolution in the performance test record Test Result column Performance Tests 2 3 2 SOURCE LEVEL ACCURACY FLATNESS TEST Description This test uses a power meter and a power sensor to measure the actual power level of the signal at several frequencies from 10 Hz to 500 MHz when the signal amplitude is set to 0 dBm The level a
242. rface Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 5 2 x1 EXECUTE TEST to run the internal test 52 24 BIT I O PORT m If the internal test 52 passes the A33 EXT I O interface board is probably working Inspect cables between the A1 CPU and the A33 EXT I O interface If the cable is good check the external instrument m If the internal test 52 fails replace the A33 EXT I O interface board Digital Control Troubleshooting 8 11 TROUBLESHOOT THE A51 GSP A52 LCD Use this procedure when the LCD Liquid Crystal Display is unacceptable or not being bright 1 Run the Internal Test 3 A51 GSP The A51 GSP can be checked using the internal test 3 A51 GSP if the test fails the ch 1 and cn 2 LEDs blink several time and a few beeps sound at the end of the test Then the analyzer returns the control settings to the power on default setting values a Press PREsET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 3 x1 EXECUTE TEST to run the internal test 3 When this test starts ch 1 LED and 2 LED are turned off b Check the ch 1 and 2 LEDs and the beeps at the end of the test m If no beep sound and the LEDs don t blink the A51 GSP is probably working Continue with the next Check the Two LEDs on A51 GSP m If a beep sounds and the LEDs blink one time the A51 GSP chip is faulty Replace the 51 GSP m If two beep sound and the LED blinks two time the A51 GSP s DRAM is faulty Replace the A51
243. rmat 116 NO STATE DATA FILES ON MEMORY There are no files on the memory disk with extensions _D or _S for LIF format or STA or DTA for DOS format 184 ALLOWED IN SVC MODE The operation is not allowed in service mode 55 NOT ENOUGH DATA The amount of data sent to the analyzer is less than that expected GPIB only 14 VALID FOR PRESENT TEST SET The calibration requested is inconsistent with the test set present This message occurs in the following situations m A full 2 port calibration is requested with a test set other than an parameter test set m A one path 2 port calibration is requested with an S parameter test set this procedure is typically used with a transmission reflection test set 34 NO VALID MEMORY TRACE If a memory trace is to be displayed or otherwise used a data trace must first be stored to memory 120 Numeric data error This error as well as errors 121 through 129 are generated when parsing a data element that appears to be numeric including the nondecimal numeric types This particular error message is used if the analyzer cannot detect a more specific error 128 Numeric data not allowed legal numeric data element was received but the analyzer does not accept it in this position for a header Messages 10 Error Messages in Alphabetical Order 146 ON POINT NOT ALLOWD FOR THE CURRENT TRIG The trigger event mode cannot be changed to
244. rough Rejection at 75 MHz gt 60 dB PN 04192 61002 1 Termination 50Q Termination type N m 909C Opt 012 or part of 3 8503288 General Information 1 5 Table 1 2 Recommended Test Equipment continued Equipment Critical Specifications Recommended Model Qty Agilent Part Number 6 dB Fixed Attenuation 50 N m N f 8491A Opt 006 2 6 dB Fixed Attenuation 50 N m N f VSWR lt 1 015 B491A Opt 006 amp Opt H60 2 10 dB Fixed Attenuation 50 9 N m N f VSWR lt 1 015 B491A Opt 010 amp Opt H60 1 Two Way Power Splitter Frequency Range 100 kHz to 500 MHz Output 11667A 1 Tracking lt 0 15 dB Cables cable 50 Q 11500B or part of 11851B 4 BNC cable 61 cm 50 Q PN 8120 1839 2 BNC cable 122 cm 50 Q PN 8120 1840 2 Adapters BNC f BNC f adapter 50 0 PN 1250 0080 1 Tee BNC m f f adapter 50 Q PN 1250 0781 1 BNC f Dual Banana Plug Adapter 50 0 PN 1251 2277 1 N m N m adapter 50 Q PN 1250 1475 1 N m BNC f adapter 50 PN 1250 0780 2 APC7 5 N f adapter 50 Q 11524 or part of 85032B 19 1 1 Option 001 optional time base is not required when a frequency standard in Table 1 2 is available 2 Required for testing an analyzer equipped with Option 1D5 High Stability Frequency Reference e Calibration values at 50 MHz are required in the tests See the Calibration Data Required for Step Attenuators later in this chapter An 8496G step
245. rts 10 41 506052 Figure 10 38 Main Frame Assembly Parts 15 23 Table 10 40 Main Frame Assembly Parts 15 23 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 1400 2198 2 3 SADDLE EDGE 28480 1400 2198 2 1400 1048 9 4 SADDLE EDGE 28480 1400 1048 10 42 Replaceable Parts 506053 Figure 10 39 Main Frame Assembly Parts Pre regulator Assembly 16 23 Table 10 41 Main Frame Assembly Parts Pre regulator Assembly 16 23 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 0950 3246 1 A40 PRE REGULATOR 28480 0950 3246 2 04396 61671 0 2 WIRE ASSY 28480 04396 61671 3 0515 1719 3 25 SCR MAXIO 28480 0515 1719 Replaceable Parts 10 43 506054 Figure 10 40 Main Frame Assembly Parts A50 DC DC Converter Assembly 17 23 Table 10 42 Main Frame Assembly Parts A50 DC DC Converter Assembly 17 23 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 4970 66550 7 1 A50 DC DC CONVERTER 28480 E4970 66550 2 1400 1391 5 4
246. s See Programming Manual 83 FORMAT NOT VALID FOR MEASUREMENT The conversion function except the 1 5 and the multiple phase modes is not valid for the Smith admittance and SWR formats 84 ANALYZER TYPE MISMATCH The analyzer receives a command that is not available for the current analyzer type Please confirm GPIB command or change analyzer type before sending the command 93 NO DATA TRACE The MARKER ON DATA is selected when the data trace is not displayed 94 NO MEMORY TRACE The MARKER ON MEMORY is selected when the memory trace is not displayed 95 NO MARKER DELTA SPAN NOT SET The MKRA SPAN softkey requires that delta marker mode be turned 96 MARKER DELTA RANGE NOT SET The MKRA SEARCH RNG softkey requires that delta marker is turned ON 97 CANT CHANGE WHILE DATA MATH ON The setting cannot be changed when the data math function is used 98 ACTIVE MARKER The marker command cannot be execute when no marker is displayed on the screen Turn on the marker before executing the marker commands 99 CAN T CHANGE WHILE DUAL CHAN OFF The Cross channel cannot be turned on when dual channel is off Turn on the dual channel before the cross channel is turned on Messages 19 Error Messages in Numerical Order 100 NO FIXED DELTA MARKER The FIXED AMKR VALUE and FIXED AMKR AUX VALUE softkey requires that fixed delta marker is turned ON 101 200 110 SAVE ERROR serious error for e
247. ss 11 0PENS OPEN M Wait until a beep sounds Then press DONE OPENS i Remove the open from the test port cable and connect a type N f short to the test port cable j Press SHORTS SHORT M Wait until beep sounds Then press DONE SHORTS G c Performance Tests 2 29 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Remove the short from the test port cable and connect a type N f 50 load to the test port cable l Press LOAD Wait until a beep sounds m Press DONE 1 PORT CAL to complete the calibration sequence n Remove the type N f 50 Q load from the test port cable Connect the test port cable to the 4395A R input On the network analyzer press MENU TRIGGER MENU SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep On the network analyzer press MKR MKR SEARCH OFF MAX to move the marker to the maximum point on the trace Record the network analyzer s marker reading with an opposite sign in the performance test record Test Result column Remove the test port cable from the 4395A R input and connect it to the A input On the network analyzer press MENU TRIGGER MENU SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep On the network analyzer press MKR MKR SEARCH OFF MAX to move the marker to the maximum point on the trace Record the network analyzer s marker reading with an opposite sign in the perfor
248. ss to the adjustment components remove the right side cover of the 4395A 3 Turn the 4395A ON 4 Press System MORE SERVICE TESTS ADJUSTMENT TESTS to display the internal adjustment tests menu 5 Press 6 6 or use to select the internal adjustment test 66 GAIN PHASE ADJ 6 Press EXECUTE TEST to run the test 7 Connect the test equipment as shown in the Figure 5 10 00000000 N m N m Cable CCS05005 Figure 5 10 IF 24 dB Gain Phase Adjustment Setup 8 Press CONT to continue the adjustment 5 20 Adjustments 9 Adjust A8 GAIN ADJ and A8 PHASE ADJ on the A8 Digital IF Board until pass is displayed on the screen A8 GAIN ADJ O O0O0000 00 00000000 E 00000000 E pm O o A O o 35 5 ed O a o O O O O OO OO O O O OO 0 o A8 PHASE ADJ CCS05018 Figure 5 11 IF 24 dB Gain Phase Adjustment Location 10 Press CONT to exit the adjustment 11 Turn the 4395A OFF and install the side cover Adjustme
249. ssembly Parts 5 23 Table 10 30 Main Frame Assembly Parts 5 23 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 04896 61701 7 1 CABLE ASSY 28480 04396 61701 2 04396 01274 3 1 HOLDER 28480 04396 01274 3 0515 0999 9 2 M2 5X0 45 L 6 FL 28480 0515 0999 4 5041 0564 4 1 KEY Q CORP WHT 28480 5041 0564 10 32 Replaceable Parts UENIT 1718 Number Mfr Part 0515 fr Code M 28480 Replaceable Parts 10 33 ion t 1p Frame Assembly Parts 6 23 Descr Frame Assembly Parts 6 23 Main Main SCR M4X12 31 C Qty D 2 1 Figure 10 29 Table 10 1718 ilent Part Number 0515 Ag 1 Ref Desig 506043 CCS06044 Figure 10 30 Main Frame Assembly Parts A20 Motherboard Assembly 7 23 Table 10 32 Main Frame Assembly Parts A20 Motherboard Assembly 7 23 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number D Code Number 1 4970 66520 1 A20 MOTHERBOARD 28480 E4970 66520 2 04396 61661 8 2 CA ASSY FLAT 100 28480 04396 61661 3 0515 1550 0 41 SCR M3 L 8 28480 0515 1550 10 34 Replaceable Parts 506045 Figure 10 31 Main Frame Assembly Parts 8 23 Table 10 33 Main Frame Assembly Parts 8 23 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig
250. t MM 5 20 Procedure 5 20 9 Receiver Gain Adjustment 5 22 Required Equipment 5 22 Procedure MM 5 22 10 IF 8 dB 16 dB Gain Adjustment S 5 25 Required Equipment 5 25 Procedure 5 25 11 Temperature Adjustment 5 26 Required Equipment 5 26 Procedure 5 26 12 Flatness Adjustment 5 27 Contents 6 Required Equipment Procedure 13 Receiver Attenuator Adjustment Required Equipment Procedure 14 IF BPF Flatness Adjustment Required Equipment Procedure 15 DC Bias Adjustment Option 010 Required Equipment SE Procedure Troubleshooting INTRODUCTION TROUBLESHOOTING SUMMARY START HERE INSPECT THE POWER ON SEQUENCE Check the Fan Check the Front Panel LEDs and Displays Check Error Message INSPECT THE REAR PANEL FEATURE Check the GPIB Interface Check the Parallel Interface Check the mini DIN Keyboard Connector Internal Tests Failure Troubleshooting Check the Power On Selftest Execute All Internal Tests Execute the Individual Test External Tests Failure Troubleshooting Performance Tests Failure Troubleshooting Perform Adjustments and Correction Constants Power Supply Troubleshooting INTRODUCTION START HERE 1 Check the Fan is Rotating 2 Check the A50 SHUTDOWN LED A50 Shutdown LED 3 Check the A1 4 5 VD LED Measure the Al 5 VD Voltage 2 FIND OUT WHY THE FAN IS
251. t the 4395A controls to the reference setting for the test Set the step attenuator to 10 dB Repeat step 8 to measure the amplitude fidelity at the 4395A B input Calculate the test results using the equations given in the calculation sheet Record the test results in the performance test record Initialize the signal generator Then set the controls as follows Controls Settings Frequency 50 1 MHz Amplitude 6 dBm Press Meas ANALYZER TYPE SPECTRUM ANALYZER Preset to initialize the 4395A Then set the controls as follows Control Settings Key Strokes Center Frequency 50 1 MHz Center 5 0 C 1 Frequency Span 120 Hz Span 1 2 0 RBW 10 Hz Bw Avg RES 1 0 x1 Video BW 10 Hz Bw Avg VIDEO BW 1 0 Ga Press Meas to set the 4395A to the R input Press Scale Ref REFERENCE VALUE C 1 x1 Scale Ref ATTENUATOR MENU ATT 0 1 to set the 4395A controls to the reference setting for the test Set the step attenuator to 20 dB Perform the following steps to measure the amplitude fidelity a On the 4395A press Search MAX to move the marker to the peak of the carrier b On the signal generator adjust the amplitude until the 4395A marker reads 30 dB 0 1 dB c On the 4395A press Trigger SINGLE to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep d Press Search MAX Marker AMODE MENU FIXED AMKR to place the delta referenc
252. t the cable to the 5041 Then continue with the next Check the A50 DC DC Converter section 4395A Top View Rear 50 DC DC Converter Pin1 Brown CCS07019 Figure 7 6 A40J1 Output Voltage 2 Check the A50 DC DC Converter a Turn the analyzer power off b Disconnect a cable form the 5073 The A50J3 location is shown in Figure 7 6 c Turn the analyzer power on d Check the voltage between the A50J3 pin 1 and pin 6 GND within 4 59 V to 5 61 V using a voltmeter with small probe m If the voltmeter reading is out of the limits replace the A50 DC DC Converter Power Supply Troubleshooting 7 9 m If the voltmeter reading is within the limits the 50 5 VD power supply is verified Turn the analyzer power off and reconnect the cable to the A50J3 Then continue with the next Disconnect Cables on the A1 CPU section 3 Disconnect Cables on the A1 CPU a Turn the analyzer power off b Disconnect cables from the Al CPU s connectors 710 711 J12 713 J14 J15 and J17 The connector locations are shown in Figure 7 7 4395A Bottom View Rear To A50 To A32 To A33
253. tart 5 1 Stop Power 15 dBm stop 1 5 x1 Number of Points 5 Sweep NUMBER of POINTS 5 a Trigger Manual Trigger TRIGGER xxx MANUAL Trigger Event On Point Trigger TRIGGER xxx TRIG EVENT ON SWEEP Then the softkey label changes to TRIGGER ON POINT Press Trigger SINGLE TRIGGER MANUAL MANUAL to start a power sweep and to set the 4395A power to the first sweep point of 5 dBm listed in Table 2 5 Table 2 5 lists test settings Verify that the step attenuator is set to 50 dB Table 2 5 Power Sweep Linearity Test Settings 2 4395A Step Attenuator Source Power 5 dBm 50 dB 0 dBm 50 dB 5 dBm 50 dB 10 dBm 50 dB 15 dBm 50 dB Wait for the power meter reading to settle Record the power meter reading in the calculation sheet Power Meter Reading column Repeat the following steps until a power sweep completed a Press MANUAL to set the source power to the next measurement point listed in Table 2 5 The sweep indicator moves to the last measurement point on the sweep The sweep indicator indicates the last measurement point on the sweep not the current point Performance Tests 2 13 b Wait for the power meter reading to settle c Record the power meter reading in the calculation sheet 14 Calculate the test results using the equation given in the calculation sheet Record the test results in the performance test record 2 14 Performance
254. tent variable in a program 213 Init ignored request for a measurement initiation was ignored as another measurement was already in progress 141 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY If a lot of tasks is executed at same time memory might be insufficient for a while For example running HP Instrument BASIC program printing a screen and sending or receiving data array by GPIB are required at same time Please wait until finishing some tasks then execute the next task 161 Invalid block data block data element was expected but was invalid for some reason see IEEE 488 2 7 7 6 2 For example an END message was received before the length was satisfied 141 Invalid character data Either the character data element contains an invalid character or the particular element received is not valid for the header Messages 7 Error Messages in Alphabetical Order 121 Invalid character in number invalid character for the data type being parsed was encountered For example an alpha character in a decimal numeric or 9 in octal data 101 Invalid character syntax element contains a character that is invalid for that type For example a header containing an ampersand SENSE amp 154 INVALID DATE The date entered to set the real time clock is invalid Reenter correct date 112 INVALID FILE NAME GPIB only The file name for the RECALL PURGE or RE SAVE function must have a D or S extension for LIF
255. ter clock wise ceramic cabinet mount only coefficient common composition complete connector cad mium plate cathode ray tube clock wise deposited carbon drive electrolytic encapsulated external farads femto flat head fillister head fixed giga germanium glass ground ed henries hexagonal mercury hour s hertz intermediate freq impregnated incandescent include s insulation ed internal kilo left hand linear taper lock washer logarithmic taper low pass filter milli meg metal film metallic oxide manufacturer miniature momentary mounting mylar nano IPL jo PO PN RFR SR OBD OH p PC P PH BRZ PHL PIV PNP P O POLY PORC POS POT PP PT PWV RECT RF RH RMO RMS 2 uv 5 LH LH U U LH H Ei m EO MICON Uu uuu U O O C deo LH LH Ul ja gi moo e 3439999348 a H lt gt a 5226 lt 52 normally closed neon nickel plate normally open negative positive zero zero temperature coefficient negative positive negative not recommended for field replacement not separately replaceable order by description oval head oxide peak printed circuit pico phosphor bronze Philips peak inverse voltage
256. the ON POINT mode because the current trigger source setting does not allow the ON POINT mode The ON POINT mode is available for only MANUAL EXTERNAL and BUS trigger sources of the network analyzer mode 56 OPTION NOT INSTALLED This error occurs when an GPIB command which is optional command is sent and the analyzer is not installed the option GPIB only Please confirm options installed to the analyzer using OPT command see Programming Manual 45 OVERLOAD ON INPUT A The power level at one of the four receiver inputs exceeds a certain level greater than the maximum input level 44 OVERLOAD ON INPUT B The power level at one of the four receiver inputs exceeds a certain level greater than the maximum input level 46 OVERLOAD ON INPUT R The power level at one of the four receiver inputs exceeds a certain level greater than the maximum input level 220 Parameter error Indicates that a program data element related error occurred This error message is used when the analyzer cannot detect the more specific errors described for errors 221 through 229 108 Parameter not allowed More parameters were received than expected for the header For example the SRE command only accepts one parameter so receiving SRE 4 16 is not allowed 48 PHASE LOCK LOOP UNLOCKED EXT REF Input of 10 MHz is not proper or the instrument is needed to adjust or repair Check the external reference signal first Contact your nearest Ag
257. tion Sheet 3 5 7 RECEIVER NOISE LEVEL TEST Frequency Input 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz 11 MHz 101 MHz 499 MHz 3 6 Calculation Sheet R A B R A B R A B R A B R A B R A B R A B R A B Trace Mean a nit Test Result 20xlog a dBm nit dBm nit dBm nit dBm nit dBm nit dBm nit dBm nit dBm nit dBm nit dBm nit dBm nit dBm nit dBm nit dBm nit dBm nit dBm nit dBm nit dBm nit dBm nit dBm nit dBm nit dBm nit dBm GG nit dBm 8 INPUT CROSSTALK TEST 10 Hz gt Freq gt 1 kHz Measurement R into A Crosstalk R into B Crosstalk 1 kHz gt Freq gt 100 kHz Measurement R into A Crosstalk R into B Crosstalk 100 kHz gt Freq gt 500 kHz Measurement R into A Crosstalk R into B Crosstalk Marker Reading a dBm dBm Marker Reading a dBm dBm Marker Reading a dBm dBm Test Result a 10 a 10 Test Result a 10 a 10 Test Result a 10 a 10 dB dB dB dB dB dB Calculation Sheet 3 7 10 ABSOLUTE AMPLITUDE ACCURACY TEST Input R Frequency 100 Hz 200 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 2 kHz 5 kHz 10 kHz 20 kHz 50 kHz 100 kHz 200 kHz
258. tkey label changes to AVERAGING ON off Press Cal CALIBRATE MENU RESPONSE THRU to perform the response THRU calibration Wait for the completion of the sweep Then press DONE RESPONSE Set the step attenuator to the first setting 10 dB in the second column of Table 2 14 Table 2 14 A R Dynamic Accuracy Test Settings 1 4395A Step Attenuator 4395A Input Level Source Power 0 dB 10 dB 8 dBm On the 4395A press Source POWER 8 to set the source power to the first setting in the third columns of Table 2 14 1 ii ii iv Record the channel 2 marker reading directly in the performance test record Use Perform the following steps to measure the dynamic accuracy Press Trigger NUMBER OF GROUPS 5 1 to make a sweep Wait for the completion of the sweep Press Marker to move the channel 1 marker to 50 1 MHz Record the channel 1 marker reading in the calculation sheet for the magnitude ratio dynamic accuracy Use the 4395A reading column corresponding to the input level in the first column of Table 2 14 Press I to move the channel 2 marker to 3 MHz the test result column of the phase measurement corresponding to the input level in the first column of Table 2 14 Change the cable connection as shown in Figure 2 15 Performance Tests 00000000 N m N m Adapter r
259. to A Crosstalk R into B Crosstalk 100 kHz lt Freq lt 500 MHz Measurement R into A Crosstalk R into B Crosstalk Test Result Test Limit lt 100 dB lt 100 dB Test Result Test Limit lt 100 dB lt 100 dB Test Result Test Limit lt 120 dB lt 120 dB 9 INPUT IMPEDANCE TEST 100 kHz lt Freq lt 100 MHz Measurement R Return Loss A Return Loss B Return Loss 100 MHz lt Freq lt 500 MHz Measurement R Return Loss A Return Loss B Return Loss Test Result Test Limit Measurement Uncertainty lt 25 dB lt 25 dB lt 25 dB Test Result Test Limit lt 15 dB lt 15 dB lt 15 dB 3 16 dB 3 16 dB 3 16 dB Measurement Uncertainty 3 16 dB 3 16 dB 3 16 dB Performance Test Record 4 7 10 ABSOLUTE AMPLITUDE ACCURACY TEST Input R Frequency Mimimum Test Result Maximum Measurement Limit Limit Uncertainty 100Hz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 17 dB 200 Hz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 17 dB 500 Hz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 17 dB 1kHz 1 5dB 1 5 dB 0 17 dB 2kHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 17 dB 5 kHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 17 dB 10kHz 1 5dB 1 5 dB 0 17 dB 20kHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 17 dB 50 kHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 17 dB 100kHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 17 dB 200kHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 17 dB 500 kHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 18 dB 1 MHz 1 5 1 5 dB 0 20 dB 2MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 20 dB 5MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 20 dB 8MHz 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 0 20 dB 10
260. tted after a program message unit RST TRIG 104 Data type error The parser recognized an unallowed data element For example numeric or string data was expected but block data was encountered 105 GET not allowed Group Execute Trigger GET was received within a program message see IEEE 488 2 7 7 108 Parameter not allowed More parameters were received than expected for the header For example the SRE command only accepts one parameter so receiving SRE 4 16 is not allowed Messages 23 Error Messages in Numerical Order 109 Missing parameter Fewer parameters were received than required for the header For example the SRE command requires one parameter so receiving only SRE is not allowed 110 Command header error An error was detected the header This error message is used when the analyzer cannot detect the more specific errors described for errors 111 through 119 111 Header separator error A character that is not a legal header separator was encountered while parsing the header For example no white space followed the header thus SRE4 is an error 112 Program mnemonic too long The header contains more than twelve characters see IEEE 488 2 7 6 1 4 1 2113 Undefined header The header is syntactically correct but it is undefined for the analyzer For example XYZ is not defined for the analyzer 114 Header Suffix out of range The value of a numeric suffix
261. uggests how to remedy system problems Power Supply Troubleshooting Digital Control Troubleshooting m Accessories Troubleshooting Each of the five functional group chapters above verifies its constituent assemblies until the faulty assembly is identified Accessories Troubleshooting verifies external RF cables and calibration kit devices Accessories Troubleshooting is the last of the gray tabbed troubleshooting chapters General Information 1 1 The following chapters are for the most part reference material Li m Replaceable Parts provides part numbers and illustrations of the replaceable assemblies and miscellaneous chassis parts together with ordering information m Post Repair Procedures contains the table of related service procedures It is a table of adjustments and verification procedures to be performed after repair or replacement of each assembly m Appendices contains the manual changes information required to make this manual compatible with earlier shipment configurations of the analyzer the motherboard pin assignment list and the power requirement m Messages contains the service related error message list 1 2 General Information PERFORMANCE TESTS The analyzer s performance tests consist of the 21 tests listed in Table 1 1 These tests verify that the analyzer s performance meets the guaranteed specifications See the Operation Manual for the specifications The analyzer s perform
262. urpose of this procedure is to minimize the first local leakage Note HP VEE Adjustment Program is not required in this adjustment Follow the procedures below and adjust proper item using the internal adjustment test Li Required Equipment None Procedure 1 Turn the 4395A OFF 2 To gain access to the adjustment components remove the top and bottom covers of the 4395A 3 Turn the 4395A ON 4 Press System SERVICE TESTS ADJUSTMENT TESTS to display the internal adjustment tests menu 5 Press 6 6 or use to select the internal adjustment test 65 A9 LO ADJ 6 Press EXECUTE TEST to run the test Adjust ADJ LO A and ADJ LO B on the A9 Input Multiplexer Board until pass is displayed on the screen 5 18 Adjustments ADJ LO A ADJ LO B CCS05016 Figure 5 9 Input Local Null Adjustment Location 8 Press CONT to exit the adjustment 9 Turn the 4395A OFF and install the bottom cover Adjustments 5 19 8 IF 24 dB Gain Phase Adjustment The purpose of this procedure is to adjust the gain phase of third IF Note HP VEE Adjustment Program is not required in this adjustment Follow the procedures below and adjust proper item using the internal adjustment test Li Required Equipment Type N Cable 61 cm 11500B or part of 11851B Procedure 1 Turn the 4395A OFF 2 To gain acce
263. voltages are out of the limits replace the A50 DC DC Converter m If all 50 power supply voltages are good the 50 pre regulator is verified 7 14 Power Supply Troubleshooting Digital Control Troubleshooting INTRODUCTION Use this procedure only if you have followed the procedures in the Troubleshooting chapter and believe the problem to be in the digital control group This procedure is designed to let you identify the bad assembly within the digital control group in the shortest possible time Whenever an assembly is replaced in this procedure refer to the Table of Related Service Procedures in the Post Repair Procedures chapter in this manual Figure 8 1 shows the digital control group in simplified block diagram form The following assemblies make up the digital control group m Al CPU A30 Front Keyboard m A32 I BASIC Interface m A33 EXT I O Interface m 451 GSP m A52 LCD Liquid Crystal Display m 53 FDD Digital Control Troubleshooting 8 1 Internal VOLATILE MEMORY SRAM BOOT ROM FLASH MEMORY EEPROM NON VOLATILE MEMORY Backup SRAM DUAL PORT SRAM _ BOARDS A20 MOTHERBOARD A2 AS 7 A9 Real Time Clock Analog Boards yo Keyboard Control A30 FRONT K
264. ws Controls Settings Measurement Function DC I Mode Display Reading Value Reading Value Measurement Range Auto Range NPLC 100 c Set the 4395A and the multimeter to the first column of Table 2 9 Table 2 9 DC Bias Current Level Test Settings 4395A 4395A Multimeter Range DC Level DC Voltage Limit Auto Range 100 mA 20 V 100 mA 10 mA 20 V 10 mA 20 V 1 mA 20 pA 20 V 100 pA 20 20 V 100 pA 1 mA 20 V 1 mA 10 20 10 100 mA 20 V 100 mA d Wait for the multimeter reading to settle Then record the reading in the calculation sheet Multimeter Reading column e Change the setting of the 4395A and the multimeter in accordance with Table 2 9 and repeat step 2 d for each setting f Calculate test results using the equation given in the calculation sheet Record the test results in the performance test record 2 20 Performance Tests 7 RECEIVER NOISE LEVEL TEST Description This test measures the 4395A receiver noise levels noise floor in the network analyzer mode at IF BW 10 Hz This measures the noise level using the marker statistics function mean when the inputs are terminated In this test the noise level trace mean value is measured in linear format Unit Then the measured values are converted to log magnitude format dBm This is done to avoid skewing the data with the marker statistics function Specification Noise level Noise
265. ws NT PC Personal Computer MM 5 2 Software Requirements 5 2 Required Test Equipment 5 3 Order of Adjustments 5 3 Performing Adjustments 5 4 Setting Up the System MM 5 4 Preparation for Using the Adjustment Program MM LZ 5 6 Installing an GPIB Card 82340 or 82341 5 6 Installing HP VEE for Windows 5 6 Installing Adjustment Program into Your 5 6 Getting Started MM 5 6 1 Frequency Reference Adjustment MM 5 8 Required Equipment 5 8 Procedure ML 5 8 2 Oven Reference Adjustment Option 1 5 MM 5 10 Required Equipment 5 10 Procedure TV 5 10 Required Equipment TV 5 10 Procedure 5 10 3 Local DAC Adjustment 5 13 Required Equipment LLL ls 4 44s 5 13 Procedure 5 13 4 Source Power Adjustment 5 14 Required Equipment 5 14 Procedure OZNP 5 14 5 Source Flatness Adjustment OZNP 5 15 Required Equipment 5 15 Procedure 5 15 6 Input DC Offset Adjustment 5 16 Required Equipment 5 16 Procedure 5 16 7 Input Local Null Adjustment 5 18 Required Equipment 5 18 Procedure MM 5 18 8 IF 24 dB Gain Phase Adjustment S 5 20 Required Equipmen
266. xample physically damaged disk surface is detected on saving a file 111 RECALL ERROR INSTR STATE PRESET serious error for example corrupted data is detected on recalling a file and this forced the analyzer to be PRESET 112 INVALID FILE NAME GPIB only The file name for the RECALL PURGE or RE SAVE function must have a D or S extension for LIF format 113 STATE DATA FILES ON DISK There are no files on the flexible disk with extensions _D or S for LIF format or STA or DTA for DOS format 114 CANT SAVE GRAPHICS WHEN COPY IN PROGRESS If you attempt to save graphics when a print is in progress this error message is displayed 115 LIF DOS COPY NOT ALLOWED If you try to copy a file between the memory disk and the flexible disk when the format of the memory disk is different from the format of the flexible disk this message is displayed 116 NO STATE DATA FILES ON MEMORY There are no files on the memory disk with extensions _D or _S for LIF format or STA or DTA for DOS format 117 DUPLICATE FILE EXTENSION The extension name entered is already used for other file types Use other extension name 119 NO DATA TRACE DISPLAYED The SCALE FOR DATA selected when the data trace is not displayed 120 NO MEMORY TRACE DISPLAYED The SCALE FOR MEMORY is selected when the memory trace is not displayed Messages 20 Error Messages in Numerical Order 124 LI
267. y MANUAL EXTERNAL and BUS trigger sources of the network analyzer mode 154 INVALID DATE The date entered to set the real time clock is invalid Reenter correct date 184 NOT ALLOWED IN SVC MODE The operation is not allowed in service mode 193 POWER ON TEST FAILED Power on test failed Contact your nearest Agilent Technologies office 201 300 267 COMPENSTATION REQUIRED Compensation is required Perform compansation to obtain compensation data Messages 22 Error Messages in Numerical Order 268 NO COMPENSATION CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS No compensation is currently in progress 269 COMPENSATION ABORTED Compensation data acquisition process is aborted 270 COMPENSATION STD LIST UNDEFINED Compensation standard list is undefined 1 100 100 Command error This is a generic syntax error that the analyzer cannot detect more specific errors This code indicates only that a command error as defined in IEEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 4 has occurred 101 200 101 Invalid character syntax element contains a character that is invalid for that type For example a header containing an ampersand SENSE amp 102 Syntax error An unrecognized command or data type was encountered For example a string was received when the analyzer was not expecting to receive a string 103 Invalid separator The parser was expecting a separator and encountered an illegal character For example the semicolon was omi
268. yzer s 10 MHz frequency reference output to the 4395A EXT REF Input on the rear panel as shown in Figure 2 6 With this L configuration both the spectrum analyzer and the 4395 are phase locked to the same reference frequency to eliminate frequency offset errors 2 Initialize the spectrum analyzer and perform the FREQ ZERO calibration in accordance with the spectrum analyzer manual 3 On the spectrum analyzer set the controls as follows Controls Reference Level the controls as follows Control Settings Frequency Span 0 Hz Source Power 10 dBm 5 Harmonics Test Settings 10 dBm Press Meas ANALYZER TYPE NETWORK ANALYZER Preset to initialize the 4395A Then set Key Strokes Span ZERO SPAN Source POWER 1 0 x1 a On the 4395A press Center 1 9 k m to set the center frequency to the first center frequency listed in the first column of Table 2 6 Table 2 6 lists test frequencies Table 2 6 Harmonics Test Settings 4395A Spectrum Analyzer Center Frequency 3nd Harmonics 3rd Harmonics Frequency RBW Frequency Frequency Span 10 kHz 20 kHz 30 kHz 1 kHz 30 Hz 500 kHz 1 MHz 1 5 MHz 1 kHz 30 Hz 10 MHz 20 MHz 30 MHz 1 kHz 30 Hz 100 MHz 200 MHz 300 MHz 1 kHz 30 Hz 250 MHz 500 MHz 150 MHz 1 kHz 30 Hz 500 MHz 1 0 GHz 1 5 GHz 1 kHz 30 Hz b On the spectrum analyzer perform the following steps to measure the harmonic

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Samsung P2050 Kasutusjuhend  Nessus 5.0 Flash Benutzerhandbuch  Samsung Samsung Star 2 Lietotāja rokasgrāmata  Operation Manual for Torque Sensors  Regolatore per ACS istantanea FC3.8  RRC3 – Rocket Recovery Controller 3 User Manual  Tucano Magnum    Hyundai HLT-37V2 LCD TV    

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file